- Manuals
- Brands
- Xerox
- Press
- Color 1000
- User Guide
Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide PDF
Summary of Content for Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide PDF
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Version 1.0 February 2015
2014 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox and Xerox and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
FreeFlow, SquareFold, Xerox prInteract, MeterAssistant, SuppliesAssistant, CentreWare, Scan to PC Desktop, and Xerox Extensible Interface Platform, are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Product status, build status, and/or specifications are subject to change without notice.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Word are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PANTONE is a registered trademark of Pantone, Inc. ScanFlowStore is a registered trademark of Nuance Communications, Inc.
Apple, Macintosh, Mac OS, and EtherTalk are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Elements of Apple's Technical User Documentation used by permission from Apple Computer, Inc.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Acrobat Reader, Distiller, Adobe PDF logo, Adobe PDF JobReady, Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. PostScript is an Adobe registered trademark used with the Adobe PostScript Interpreter, the Adobe page description language, and other Adobe products. This product is not endorsed or sponsored by Adobe Systems, publisher of Adobe Photoshop.
Fiery and PrintMe are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging, Inc.Creo is a registered trademark of Creo, Inc.Plockmatic is a trademark of CFS Products Inc.GBC
andAdvancedPunch are trademarks or registered trademarks of General Binding Corporation.GBC, and e/Binder 200 are trademarks or registered trademarks of General Binding Corporation.HP, HPGL, HPGL/2, and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications.UNIX is a registered trademark of the Open Group.Mozilla Firefox is a trademark of Mozilla Foundation.AOL is registered trademark of AOL Incorporated.Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.Netware is a registered trademark of Novell, Incorporated.Equitrac Office is a registered trademark of Equitrac Corporation.Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.DocuWorks is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
BR678
Table of Contents 1 Product overview........................................................................................1-1
Quick start/links....................................................................................................................1-2 User Interface........................................................................................................................1-2
Logon...........................................................................................................................1-3 Language...................................................................................................................1-3
Change language......................................................................................1-4 Power saver................................................................................................................1-4
Print server overview...........................................................................................................1-4 Full Width Array....................................................................................................................1-5 Specialty Dry Inks................................................................................................................1-5
Gold dry ink and silver dry ink............................................................................1-6 Clear dry ink..............................................................................................................1-6
Full flood.......................................................................................................1-6 Spot.................................................................................................................1-7
Power on/off the machine................................................................................................1-7 Feeding and finishing devices.........................................................................................1-8
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF).......................................................1-8 Interface Module....................................................................................................1-8 GBCAdvancedPunch.......................................................................................1-9 High Capacity Stacker........................................................................................1-10 Perfect Binder........................................................................................................1-10 Standard Finisher.................................................................................................1-11 Booklet Maker Finisher......................................................................................1-11 SquareFold Trimmer Module...........................................................................1-12 Standard Finisher Plus........................................................................................1-12 Third-Party Finishing Devices..........................................................................1-13
2 Where to find help....................................................................................2-1 User Interface help..............................................................................................................2-1 Help on the World Wide Web..........................................................................................2-2 Print server customer documentation.........................................................................2-2
3 Machine/job status...................................................................................3-1 Machine status......................................................................................................................3-1
System menu............................................................................................................3-1 Dry ink/toner status area.....................................................................................3-1 Billing and Counters...............................................................................................3-2
Viewing/reseting Billing Meters/Usage Counters.........................3-2
iXerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Billing and counters information........................................................3-2 Impressions information........................................................................3-3
Maintenance (on the UI).....................................................................................3-4 Job status................................................................................................................................3-5
Job/machine status area.....................................................................................3-5 Job summary............................................................................................................3-6 Pause............................................................................................................................3-6
4 Submitting a print job.............................................................................4-1 Printing from your computer...........................................................................................4-1 Printing from the Xerox FreeFlow Print Server..........................................................4-1 Printing from the Xerox EX Print Server, Powered by EFI.....................................4-2 Printing from the Xerox CX Print Server, Powered by Creo..................................4-2
5 System Administrator overview...........................................................5-1 Logging on as Administrator...........................................................................................5-1 System administrator options.........................................................................................5-1
6 Paper information.....................................................................................6-1 Loading media in Trays 1 and 2.....................................................................................6-1
Loading paper..........................................................................................................6-1 Loading tab stock...................................................................................................6-1 Loading transparencies........................................................................................6-2 Loading pre-drilled stock for 1-sided print jobs..........................................6-3 Loading pre-drilled stock for 2-sided print jobs..........................................6-3
Skew adjustment levers.....................................................................................................6-5 Tray Properties.......................................................................................................................6-6 Tray stock mismatch...........................................................................................................6-7
7 Manage Stock Library..............................................................................7-1 Recommended Media List (RML)..................................................................................7-2 Stock management.............................................................................................................7-2 Manage Stock Library window.......................................................................................7-2
Adding a stock entry.............................................................................................7-3 Copying a stock entry...........................................................................................7-4 Creating a new stock (from Manage Stock Library).................................7-4 Creating a new stock (from Tray Properties)...............................................7-5 Editing an existing stock in the Stock Library..............................................7-5 Removing a stock from the Stock Library......................................................7-6
8 Advanced Stock Setup.............................................................................8-1 Advanced Stock Setup options.......................................................................................8-2
Tips for using Advanced Stock Setup options.............................................8-3
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Pressesii User Guide
Table of Contents
Create/modify Advanced Stock Setup options...........................................8-4 Paper tray/paper feed options........................................................................................8-5
Stock By Name Only..............................................................................................8-5 Multifeed Detection...............................................................................................8-5 Near Empty Detection Level..............................................................................8-6 Antiqued Image Effect.........................................................................................8-6 Tray Air Assist...........................................................................................................8-6 Enable Tray Heater.................................................................................................8-7
Paper path/paper transportation options..................................................................8-7 Aligner Roll Pressure...............................................................................................8-7 Second (2nd) bias transfer roll..........................................................................8-8
Mottle............................................................................................................8-9 Color shift...................................................................................................8-10 Selecting the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll settings...............................8-10
Fuser Temperature...............................................................................................8-11 Fold Adjustment Profile..................................................................................................8-12
9 Maintenance...............................................................................................9-1 Cleaning procedures...........................................................................................................9-1
Cleaning the UI screen.........................................................................................9-1 Cleaning the paper path......................................................................................9-1
Cleaning the paper path area 2..........................................................9-2 Cleaning the paper path areas 3 and 4...........................................9-4 Cleaning the paper path area 5..........................................................9-7 Cleaning the paper path area 6..........................................................9-9 Cleaning the paper path area 7.......................................................9-12
Replacing consumable supplies...................................................................................9-15 Consumable supplies..........................................................................................9-15 Replacing a dry ink/toner cartridge..............................................................9-16 Dry ink/toner waste bottle...............................................................................9-19
Replacing a dry ink/toner waste bottle..........................................9-20 Replacing the fuser web assembly................................................................9-21
10 Problem solving.....................................................................................10-1 Locating the machine serial number.........................................................................10-1
Machine serial number on the UI.................................................................10-1 Serial number on the machine.......................................................................10-1
Calling for service..............................................................................................................10-2 General problems..............................................................................................................10-2 Jam clearance.....................................................................................................................10-7
Automatic Paper Purge......................................................................................10-7
iiiXerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Table of Contents
Paper jams in Trays 1 and 2.............................................................................10-8 Paper jams in area 2...........................................................................................10-9 Paper jams in areas 3 and 4.........................................................................10-12 Paper jams in area 5........................................................................................10-15 Paper jams in area 6........................................................................................10-17 Paper jams in area 7........................................................................................10-20
Fault codes........................................................................................................................10-23 Image quality...................................................................................................................10-42
Charge corotrons...............................................................................................10-45 When to replace a charge corotron assembly..........................10-45 Which charge corotron assembly to replace............................10-45 Banding samples..................................................................................10-46
11 Technical data.......................................................................................11-1 Machine specifications...................................................................................................11-1
Tray capacity..........................................................................................................11-1 Throughput information for all paper trays..............................................11-2 Machine warmup time.......................................................................................11-2 First print-out time..............................................................................................11-2
Paper specifications..........................................................................................................11-2 Environmental specifications.......................................................................................11-4
12 Offset Catch Tray (OCT)....................................................................12-1 Enabling the Offset Mode on the EX Print Server................................................12-1
13 Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)....................................13-1 Overview................................................................................................................................13-1
Postcard bracket...................................................................................................13-2 Using the Postcard bracket.................................................................13-2
Loading media in the OHCF..........................................................................................13-4 Loading paper in the OHCF.............................................................................13-4 Loading tabs in the OHCF................................................................................13-4 Loading transparencies in the OHCF...........................................................13-5 Loading pre-drilled stock into the OHCF for 1-sided print
jobs......................................................................................................................13-5 Loading pre-drilled stock into the OHCF for 2-sided print
jobs......................................................................................................................13-6 Skew adjustment levers..................................................................................................13-7 Tray Properties....................................................................................................................13-9 Tray stock mismatch......................................................................................................13-10 OHCF problem solving..................................................................................................13-11
Clearing OHCF jams.........................................................................................13-11
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Pressesiv User Guide
Table of Contents
Paper jams inside the OHCF trays.................................................13-12 OHCF paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c................................13-12 OHCF paper jams at lever 1b and knob 1c................................13-13 OHCF paper jams at lever 1d and knob 1c................................13-14
OHCF fault codes...............................................................................................13-16 OHCF specifications.......................................................................................................13-24
14 Interface Module..................................................................................14-1 Overview................................................................................................................................14-1
Control panel.........................................................................................................14-2 Paper path..............................................................................................................14-3
Paper curl settings on the module..............................................................................14-3 Preset decurler settings.....................................................................................14-3 Manual decurler buttons...................................................................................14-3
Problem solving..................................................................................................................14-4 Clearing jams.........................................................................................................14-4
Paper jams at lever 1a..........................................................................14-4 Paper jams at lever 2a..........................................................................14-5 Paper jams at lever 2b..........................................................................14-7
Fault codes..............................................................................................................14-8
15 High Capacity Stacker (HCS)...........................................................15-1 Overview................................................................................................................................15-1
Identifying the components...........................................................................15-2 Control panel.........................................................................................................15-3 HCS top tray...........................................................................................................15-3
Unloading the Stacker Tray...........................................................................................15-4 Problem solving..................................................................................................................15-5
General problems.................................................................................................15-5 Jam clearance........................................................................................................15-5
HCS entrance jams (E1, E2, and E3)...............................................15-5 HCS transport jams (E4, E5, and E6)...............................................15-6 HCS top tray jam (E7)...........................................................................15-7 HCS exit jam (E8)....................................................................................15-8
Hints and tips for using the HCS....................................................................15-9 Loss of power......................................................................................................15-10 Fault codes...........................................................................................................15-10
Specifications...................................................................................................................15-25
16 Perfect Binder........................................................................................16-1 Binder components..........................................................................................................16-2
External components..........................................................................................16-2
vXerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Table of Contents
Cover inserter.........................................................................................................16-4 Internal components..........................................................................................16-5 Binder control panel............................................................................................16-6 Binder circuit breaker..........................................................................................16-7
Book binding path.............................................................................................................16-8 Bypass path............................................................................................................16-8 Standard path.......................................................................................................16-9 Cover inserter path...........................................................................................16-10
Power on/off.....................................................................................................................16-11 Power Saver mode.............................................................................................16-11
Loading media in the cover inserter tray..............................................................16-12 Removing books from the binder.............................................................................16-13 Submitting a job to the binder..................................................................................16-13
Printing from your computer to the binder.............................................16-13 Printing from the Xerox FreeFlow Print Server to the Perfect
Binder..............................................................................................................16-14 Binder manual mode with the FreeFlow Print Server............16-14 Printing/binding with preprinted covers to the FreeFlow
Print Server.......................................................................................16-15 Printing/binding from a single file to the FreeFlow Print
Server..................................................................................................16-17 Printing from the Xerox CX Print Server, Powered by Creo to the
Perfect Binder...............................................................................................16-18 Binder manual mode with the CX Print Server.........................16-18 Printing/binding from a single file to the CX Print
Server..................................................................................................16-19 Printing/binding from two files to the CX Print Server..........16-20
Printing from the Xerox EX Print Server, Powered by EFI to the Perfect Binder...............................................................................................16-21
Binder manual mode with the EX Print Server.........................16-21 Printing/binding with preprinted covers to the EX Print
Server..................................................................................................16-22 Printing/binding from a single file to the EX Print
Server..................................................................................................16-23 Maintenance....................................................................................................................16-25
Cleaning the binder..........................................................................................16-25 Empty the trimmer waste tray.....................................................................16-26 Adhesive filling tray..........................................................................................16-26
Replenishing the adhesive filling tray..........................................16-27 Binder problem solving.................................................................................................16-27
Paper jams in areas E1 and E2....................................................................16-28 Paper jams in area E3......................................................................................16-29 Paper jams in area E4......................................................................................16-30
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Pressesvi User Guide
Table of Contents
Paper jams in areas E5 and E6....................................................................16-30 General problems..............................................................................................16-32
Power interruption during operation............................................16-32 Adjusting the printed image and trim.........................................16-33
Fault codes...........................................................................................................16-33 Paper size and trim recommendations for perfect bound books................16-37 Binder specifications.....................................................................................................16-38
17 Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher..................................................17-1 Manual decurling feature on the finisher................................................................17-3 Folding feature...................................................................................................................17-4
Fold types................................................................................................................17-4 Loading paper/tabs in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)..................................17-6 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................17-7
Standard/Booklet Maker consumable supplies........................................17-7 Replace the standard staple cartridge........................................................17-7 Replace the booklet staple cartridge............................................................17-9 Replacing the Staple Waste Container on the finisher......................17-10 Empty the Punch Waste Container............................................................17-12
Finisher problem solving..............................................................................................17-13 Paper jams in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)...................................17-14 Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c..........................................................17-15 Paper jams at lever 1d.....................................................................................17-16 Paper jams at lever 1b.....................................................................................17-17 Paper jams at lever 3b and 3d.....................................................................17-18 Paper jams at lever 3e and knob 3c...........................................................17-19 Paper jams at lever 3g and knob 3f...........................................................17-20 Paper jams at lever 4b and knob 3a..........................................................17-21 Paper jams at lever 2a and knob 3a..........................................................17-22 Paper jams at lever 2b and knob 2c..........................................................17-23 Paper jams at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d..................................................................17-24 Paper jams at 2d and lever 2g.....................................................................17-25 Paper jams at unit 4 and knob 4a..............................................................17-26 Paper jams at finisher top tray....................................................................17-27 Paper jams at finisher stacker tray.............................................................17-28 Paper jams at the optional booklet maker tray....................................17-29 Stapler faults.......................................................................................................17-30
Staple jams in the standard staple cartridge...........................17-30 Staple jams in the booklet maker cartridge..............................17-32
Reinserting the standard staple cartridge...............................................17-34 Fault codes...........................................................................................................17-36
viiXerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Table of Contents
Specifications...................................................................................................................17-47 Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher...............................................................17-47 Optional C/Z Folder..........................................................................................17-50
18 SquareFold Trimmer Module...........................................................18-1 Overview................................................................................................................................18-1 Identifying the components.........................................................................................18-2
Main components................................................................................................18-2 Paper path..............................................................................................................18-3 Control panel.........................................................................................................18-4
Square Fold feature..........................................................................................................18-4 Square fold options.............................................................................................18-5 Accessing the Square Fold options...............................................................18-6
Trimmer feature.................................................................................................................18-7 Trimmer options...................................................................................................18-7 Trim guidelines......................................................................................................18-8 Accessing the Trimmer options...................................................................18-10
Hints and tips...................................................................................................................18-11 Printing full-page images on booklets......................................................18-11 Follow these tips................................................................................................18-11
Problem solving...............................................................................................................18-12 Jam clearance.....................................................................................................18-12
Clearing jams.........................................................................................18-12 Clearing E1/E2 jams............................................................................18-13 Clearing E3 jams..................................................................................18-15
Fault codes...........................................................................................................18-15 Technical data..................................................................................................................18-26
Specifications......................................................................................................18-26
19 Standard Finisher Plus........................................................................19-1 Overview................................................................................................................................19-1 Finisher Module..................................................................................................................19-2
Finisher Module main components..............................................................19-2 Folding feature......................................................................................................19-3
Fold types...................................................................................................19-4 Loading paper/tabs in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter).....................19-5
Finishing Transport...........................................................................................................19-6 Finishing Transport main components........................................................19-6 Finishing Transport status indicators...........................................................19-7
Standard Finisher Plus maintenance.........................................................................19-8 Standard Finisher Plus consumable supplies............................................19-8
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Pressesviii User Guide
Table of Contents
Replace the standard staple cartridge........................................................19-8 Replacing the Staple Waste Container on the finisher......................19-10 Empty the Punch Waste Container............................................................19-12
Problem solving...............................................................................................................19-13 Paper jams in the Finisher Module.............................................................19-13
Paper jams in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter)......................19-13 Paper jams inside the finisher left cover.....................................19-14 Paper jams inside the finisher right cover..................................19-17 Paper jams at the optional C/Z Folder.........................................19-22 Paper jams at the finisher output area.......................................19-29
Paper jams in the Finishing Transport......................................................19-30 Paper jams in area 1...........................................................................19-30 Paper jams in area 2...........................................................................19-32 Paper jams in area 3...........................................................................19-33 Paper jams in area 4...........................................................................19-34
Stapler faults.......................................................................................................19-35 Staple jams in the standard staple cartridge...........................19-35
Standard Finisher Plus fault codes.............................................................19-37 Finisher Module fault codes.............................................................19-37 Finishing Transport fault codes......................................................19-38 Third-party DFA fault codes.............................................................19-42
Specifications...................................................................................................................19-44 Finisher Module specifications....................................................................19-44
Optional C/Z Folder.............................................................................19-47 Finishing Transport specifications..............................................................19-47
ixXerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Table of Contents
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Pressesx User Guide
Table of Contents
1 Product overview
The following illustration shows a basic configuration of the digital press:
1. Print engine - left side
a. Upper left door: containing dry ink/toner cartridges b. Upper right door: containing dry ink/toner cartridges c. Left front door d. Right front door e. Trays 1 and 2; additional feeding accessories available
2. Print engine - right side
a. Left front door b. Right front door
3. User Interface (UI) 4. Optional Offset Catch Tray (OCT); additional optional finishing accessories available
1-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Quick start/links The following quick links will help you start using your machine quickly and easily:
Power on/off the machine
Where to find help
Loading paper
Submitting a print job
Jam clearance
Replacing a dry ink/toner cartridge
Replacing a dry ink/toner waste bottle
Logging on as Administrator
User Interface The User Interface (UI) displays messages that indicate the status of the machine during idle, run, or fault conditions.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses1-2 User Guide
Product overview
Related Topics:
User Interface help
System menu
Job status
Logon
Language
Power saver
Pause
Dry ink/toner status area
Maintenance (on the UI)
Manage Stock Library
Paper information
Machine status
Logon
There are three logon levels:
Operator: This is the default logon level.
Administrator: This level allows you to customize the system defaults for your machine and to customize particular print jobs by creating, setting, or changing parameters for certain features.
Technical Key Operator: This level is reserved for users who are certified by Xerox to perform certain maintenance activities that are normally done by a customer service engineer (CSE).
Note Refer to the System Administration Guide for more information on the Administrator and Technical Key Operator features.
Related Topics:
Logging on as Administrator
Language
Note The number of languages available on your system depends on what was installed during the initial installation process.
Selecting a particular Language button immediately changes the language. No confirmation is required.
1-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Product overview
Change language
To change the language, use the following procedure.
1. Select the Language button on the UI. 2. Select the desired language button; the language on the UI changes to the new
language and closes the Language window. 3. Select the Cancel button to return to the main UI screen.
Power saver
The machine automatically enters the power saver mode after fifteen minutes of inactivity. This time may be changed to reflect a value of 1-240 minutes; you must enter the Administrator mode to change it.
There are two Power Saver modes:
System PC & Print Engine: Selecting this option places both the machine and the System PC in power saver mode.
Print Engine Only: Selecting this option places only the machine in power saver mode.
The system exits the Power Saver mode when a job is sent to be printed or the UI on the System PC is activated.
Note To manually exit Power Saver mode, press the Power Saver button on the System PC.
Refer to the System Administration Guide for more information on this feature.
Print server overview One of the following print servers may be available and used with your machine:
Xerox FreeFlow Print Server Xerox CX Print Server, Powered by Creo
Xerox EX Print Server, Powered by Fiery
Note For detailed information on your specific print server, refer to the customer documentation that was delivered with it.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses1-4 User Guide
Product overview
Full Width Array Your digital press may include an internal color calibration function referred to as Full Width Array. This is located in Area 6 of the print engine right side.
Note If the Full Width Array feature is not available on your press, contact your Xerox representative.
The Full Width Array feature uses xerographic parameters and diagnostics to scan the finished image and correct errors in registration, density and color. This is the process of calibrating the Print Server with the digital press. There are now internal color calibration strips (or tiles) used as reference for known colors of a test pattern. These color values are automatically adjusted to produce accurate and consistent reproductions, and this means that no longer is customer intervention required. It also allows the customer to maintain tighter image quality control over the output of their system.
Note Refer to your Print Server user documentation when performing the calibration workflow of the Print Server in conjunction with the digital press. Also refer to the System Administration Guide for detailed information on the Full Width Array feature.
Specialty Dry Inks In addition to the C,M,Y,K colors, the Xerox Color Press offers printing from the 5th housing module with one of the following specialty dry inks:
Clear Dry Ink
Gold Dry Ink
Silver Dry Ink
1-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Product overview
When in five color printing mode, the press maintains 80/100 prints per minute (ppm) productivity across all supported media.
Gold dry ink and silver dry ink
The Gold and Silver dry ink options for the 5th color cartridge are metallic Pantone colors that offer high reflectance capability. They provide an alternative to using offline foil stamping in your print job.
Use these metallic dry inks to highlight logos or graphic images where silver or gold is needed. These dry inks can be used for documents such as certificates, invitations, photos and other collaterals or packaging.
Clear dry ink
The clear dry ink is an optional fifth module that provides full and spot page coverage enhancement to print jobs.
The clear dry ink capability utilizes two methods to enhance the coverage area of printed output. These two methods are full flood and spot (applied to specific areas only). Both workflow methods use a varnish or clear coat to achieve desired effects.
Full flood
Full flood varnish provides a uniform, glossy finish on the printed output when it is used with high-end applications. The full flood option provides full page coverage as a clear, glossy finish (varnish) which enhances the overall appearance within an application or on a single sheet.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses1-6 User Guide
Product overview
Spot
Using the spot option within a supported application allows the user to indicate a specific area, or multiple areas where a clear dry ink will be applied to the printed output. This is done in order to accent or highlight the desired area. Spot varnish can be used to:
Varnish (apply a glossy finish to) specific areas of a print job
Create artistic effects and highlights on a print job
Enhance the appearance of metallic items with key colors such as silver, gold, or copper
Enhance pastel colors with a pearly luster affect
Highlight images for visual variety to make them lift off the page (a three-dimensional affect)
Draw attention to headline text
Highlight photos, logos, or other image areas
Highlight watermarks
Power on/off the machine Use the power switch to power ON or power OFF the machine.
Power on: Press the power switch to the ON position to power on the machine.
A screen message advises of a short wait while the fuser warms up and the machine runs a system check. You can program the machine for a job during this time and the printing process will start automatically when the machine is ready.
Power off: Press the power switch to the OFF position to power off the machine.
Note Allow the machine to remain off for a minimum of 10 seconds before switching the power on again.
1-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Product overview
The Power on/off switch is found on the Print Engine Right Side as shown in the following illustration. The circled area indicates the location of the power switch.
Feeding and finishing devices Available with your machine is a variety of optional feeding and finishing devices. These devices are briefly discussed on the following pages along with where to find specific information on each device.
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
2-tray Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Related Topics:
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Interface Module Important The Interface Module is required with all finishing devices.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses1-8 User Guide
Product overview
The Interface Module provides communication between the print engine and any attached finishing device.
Related Topics:
Interface Module
GBCAdvancedPunch
The GBC AdvancedPunch may be attached to a variety of optional finishing accessories.
The GBC AdvancedPunch provides another level of finishing options to your output by allowing you to punch holes in 8.5 x 11 in./A4 documents, which support a variety of binding styles. Punch types include 19-hole to a maximum of 32-hole for 8.5 x 11 in. media. A4 media supports punch types 21-hole to a maximum of 47-hole.
Note The GBC AdvancedPunch is shown here with the required Interface Module and with the optional Booklet Maker Finisher and the optional C/Z Folder.
Information on this device can be found on the customer documentation CD that came with the accessory, or documentation can be downloaded from www.xerox.com. From the website, enter the machine product name in the Search field and select the User Documentation link.
1-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Product overview
High Capacity Stacker
The High Capacity Stacker (HCS) is an optional finishing device that provides stacking and offsetting capabilities for output to a Stacker Tray.
Related Topics:
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Perfect Binder
The Perfect Binder is an optional finishing device that takes the printed output and binds it into a finished book; a front and back cover is included with the bound output.
Note The Perfect Binder requires the Interface Module.
Perfect binding is a process in which the leaves (pages) are bound by using an adhesive and trimming off the excess edges. The adhesive holds the interior sheets of the book together. Front and back covers may be included if desired. The final output is a finished, perfect bound book with a wrap-around cover.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses1-10 User Guide
Product overview
Standard Finisher
This finisher provides a wide range of finishing/folding options.
Note The Standard Finisher is shown here with the required Interface Module and with the optional C/Z Folder.
Related Topics:
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Booklet Maker Finisher
This finisher provides a wide range of finishing/folding options.
Note The Booklet Maker Finisher is shown here with the required Interface Module and with the optional C/Z Folder.
Related Topics:
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
1-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Product overview
SquareFold Trimmer Module
The SquareFold Trimmer Module is an optional finishing device that is used in conjunction with a finishing device that contains a booklet maker.
Note The SquareFold Trimmer Module is shown here with the required Interface Module and the required Booklet Maker Finisher.
Related Topics:
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Standard Finisher Plus
The Standard Finisher Plus serves as an interface to transfer paper between the print engine and any third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) device attached to the machine.
Note The Standard Finisher Plus requires the Interface Module.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses1-12 User Guide
Product overview
Third-Party Finishing Devices
Additional third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) devices are also available. Always refer to the Finishing Solutions Guide and/or contact the Xerox sales representative for more information.
Note All third-party, DFA devices require BOTH the Interface Module and the Standard Finisher Plus.
1-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Product overview
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses1-14 User Guide
Product overview
2 Where to find help
User Interface help Your machines User Interface (UI) comes with online Help.
This online Help provides information on:
How to use and maintain your machine and optional accessories How to set up and change passwords and default settings
The Help pull-down menu opens a new window which displays the same type of information as provided in both this guide and the System Administration Guide.
Once the main Help window opens, various help topics and information are available:
On the left side of the help window two tabs are available:
- Content: Select this tab to have access to the various machine help information, such as Product Overview or Paper Information.
- Index: Select this tab to access a full index and the selection of specific topics/areas of interest or point of need.
2-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
In the Content area main topics are displayed to the right of the book icons. Selecting a book icon expands the view and provides selections to subtopics.
The right and left arrow buttons advance forward or backward one topic at a time using the same order as displayed on the Content tab.
Help on the World Wide Web Xerox on the World Wide Web: For system support, user help, customer documentation, and service support, go to www.xerox.com and click the Contact Us link for specific contact information/telephone numbers in your area.
It may be helpful to know your machine serial number before calling for support. The machine serial number is shown on the Machine Details tab ( System > Machine Details).
Related Topics:
System menu
Print server customer documentation Supporting customer documentation for your print server is on a CD/DVD and is shipped with the print server. You or your System Administrator should print these documents, after the installation is complete.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses2-2 User Guide
Where to find help
3 Machine/job status
Related Topics:
Locating the machine serial number
Calling for service
Machine status
System menu
The System menu allows you to select the following options:
Machine Details:This option provides information about the installed system software, any attached optional feeding/finishing accessories, error log details, customer support telephone number, and the machine serial number.
Shutdown System PC:This option shuts down the User Interface and the system PC.
Restart User Interface:This option stops and exits the User Interface and then restarts it.
Exit User Interface:This option exits the User Interface but leaves the System PC running.
Dry ink/toner status area
This area of the UI displays the status of the dry ink/toner cartridges with a gauge indicating the level/amount of dry ink/toner for each cartridge.
Note Your machine may have an optional fifth dry ink/toner cartridge installed. All characteristics described for the dry ink/toner cartridges also applies to the optional fifth dry ink/toner cartridge as well.
Related Topics:
3-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Replacing a dry ink/toner cartridge
Billing and Counters
The meters/counters vary depending on your machine configuration and setup.
Related Topics:
Billing and counters information
Impressions information
Viewing/reseting Billing Meters/Usage Counters
Viewing/reseting Billing Meters/Usage Counters Note The Billing Meters CANNOT be reset.
1. From the machines UI, select the Billing and Counters feature. 2. The Billing Meters and Usage Counters screen is displayed. 3. To reset the counters, perform the following:
a) Select the Usage Counters tab. b) Select Reset All.
A screen displays the following message: Are you sure you want to reset all the usage counters to zero?
c) Select Yes to reset the counters; select No to exit and return to the meters/counters.
4. Select Close to exit the meters/counters and return to the main UI.
Billing and counters information
The Billing Meters tab displays the total number of prints for both black and white and color output. The information displayed may vary from market place to market place.
Note These meters CANNOT be reset.
The Usage Counter tab works the same way as a trip odometer in a car. It can be reset to zero. Once it is reset to zero, it keeps track of the print count from that point forward until you select the Reset All button.
Note If the optional clear dry ink/toner is present, the Usage Counters tab displays two additional print counters: Clear Impressions and Clear Large Impressions.
Note The information displayed on this screen may vary from market place to market place.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses3-2 User Guide
Machine/job status
Impressions information
The meter and counters display the total impression amount. An impression is the image on one side of one sheet of media. The meters and counters display the total impression amount for all printed jobs. The impression information is separated into the following categories:
Color Impressions: This value (number) represents the total number of color impressions regardless of the media size.
- For each color, one-sided printed output, the meter increases by one.
- For each color, two-sided printed output, the meter increases by two.
Black Impressions: This value (number) represents the total number of black-only impressions regardless of the media size.
- For each black-only, one-sided printed output, the meter increases by one.
- For each black-only, two-sided printed output, the meter increases by two.
Total Impressions: This value (number) represents the total number of ALL impressions regardless of size or color. It is the sum of the Color Impressions and the Black Impressions combined.
Color Large Impressions: This value (number) represents the total number of large color impressions. These impressions are one side of one sheet of large media (for example 11 x17 in./A3). Large Impressions are any prints that are larger than 8.5 x 14 in./B4 size.
- For each large, color, one-sided printed output, the meter increases by one.
- For each large, color, two-sided printed output, the meter increases by two.
Note This meter/counter is NOT added to the Total Impressions meter/counter since it is already added to the Color Impressions meter/counter.
Black Large Impressions: This value (number) represents the total number of large, black-only impressions. These impressions are one side of one sheet of large media (for example 11 x17 in./A3). Large Impressions are any prints that are larger than 8.5 x 14 in./B4 size.
- For each large, black-only, one-sided printed output, the meter increases by one.
- For each large, black-only, two-sided printed output, the meter increases by two.
Note This meter/counter is NOT added to the Total Impressions meter/counter since it is already added to the Black Impressions meter/counter.
3-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Machine/job status
Maintenance (on the UI)
Selecting Maintenance on the UI opens a window which displays a status of each consumable.
If logged on as Administrator, the additional Maintenance tab is available. Refer to the System Administration Guide for more information
Note When a Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) consumable item is depleted, the machine automatically interrupts the current job and does not restart until the consumable is replaced.
Tip The machine does not interrupt a job or stop running if a Service Representative Replaceable Unit status indicates a low or depleted level. Your Service Representative Replaceable Unit may continue to perform as expected far beyond the average life indicator. Your Service Representative uses this status indicator information each time service is performed on your machine.
Related Topics:
Replacing consumable supplies
Consumable supplies
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses3-4 User Guide
Machine/job status
Job status
Job/machine status area
This area of the screen displays the status of the machine as well as displaying the status of any currently printing job (Summary button).
1. Job status area 2. Machine status area
Tip Some print servers do not update the print engine with the status of the job that is currently printing. This means that the progress bar on the print engines UI may continue to display zero percentage (0%) for the printing status. If this occurs, always check the print servers UI for the status of the currently printing job.
3-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Machine/job status
Job summary
Selecting the Summary button opens the Current Job Summary window. The Summary button is selectable only when jobs are currently printing.
Pause
Selecting the Pause button during a print job stops or pauses the printing process.
Once a print job is paused, you may resume printing or cancel the job.
Note Depending on the Administrator setting, your machine may automatically resume printing after a preset period of time without selecting the Resume button. Ask your Administrator about this, or refer to the System Administration Guide for more information.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses3-6 User Guide
Machine/job status
4 Submitting a print job
These exercises require the PDF files for the User Guide and System Administration Guide. If you do not have an electronic copy of these PDFs, download them from www.xerox.com.
The exercises instruct you on how to print one of the customer documentation guides (User Guide or System Administration Guide).
Printing from your computer 1. From your computer open one of the PDFs files in Adobe Acrobat Reader. 2. Select File > Print. 3. Select the desired printer and print queue. 4. Select the Properties button for that machine. 5. Select the desired output options such as quantity, 1- or 2-sided printing. 6. Select OK to close the Properties window. 7. Select OK to send the job to the printer.
Printing from the Xerox FreeFlow Print Server 1. Copy the customer documentation PDF files onto a storage device such as a flash
drive or CD/DVD. 2. Connect your storage device to the print server. 3. From the FreeFlow Printer Server, select Services > Print from File. 4. Select Browse. 5. Browse to your storage device containing the PDF files. 6. Select and highlight one of the PDF files (User Guide, System Administration Guide).
4-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
7. Select OK. 8. Select the desired print queue. 9. Select the desired output options such as quantity, 1- or 2-sided printing.
10. Select Print. The job is sent to the desired queue and either held or immediately printed.
11. Select Close.
Printing from the Xerox EX Print Server, Powered by EFI 1. Copy the customer documentation PDF files onto a storage device such as a flash
drive or CD/DVD. 2. Connect your storage device to the print server. 3. From the Xerox EX Printer Server, select File > Import Job. 4. Select the desired queue such as Print or Hold. 5. Select Add. 6. Browse to your storage device containing the PDF files. 7. Select and highlight one of the PDF files (User Guide, System Administration Guide). 8. Select Open. 9. Select Import.
The job is sent to the selected queue or to the printer for immediate printing.
Printing from the Xerox CX Print Server, Powered by Creo 1. Copy the customer documentation PDF files onto a storage device such as a flash
drive or CD/DVD. 2. Connect your storage device to the print server. 3. From the Xerox CX Printer Server, select File > Import. 4. Select the desired queue such as ProcessStore or ProcessPrint. 5. Browse to your storage device containing the PDF files. 6. Select and highlight one of the PDF files (User Guide, System Administration Guide). 7. Select Add. 8. Select Import.
The job is sent to the selected queue or to the printer for immediate printing.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses4-2 User Guide
Submitting a print job
5 System Administrator overview
Logging on as Administrator 1. Select the Logon button from the main UI window.
The Logon screen appears. 2. From the Logon screen select Administrator. 3. Use the keyboard to enter the Administrator password.
Note For security reasons, only asterisks are displayed on the screen.
4. Select the OK button.
Note It is recommended that you change the Administrator password as soon as possible after installing the machine in order to prevent unauthorized access to the Administrator mode.
5. To exit the Administrator mode, select the Logoff button.
System administrator options The system Administrator mode includes setting, changing, and testing the following features:
Paper Curl Settings (Advanced Stock Setup)
Running test prints (for changes made to Advanced Stock Setup options)
5-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
System Setting functions, including:
- Language - Changing the Administrator password - Resetting the Technical Key Operator password - Automatic display of fault windows - Date and time - Productivity settings - Power saver settings - Attention sounds - Tray options, such as automatic tray switching (ATS) - Output Devices - Image quality options - Full Width Array
Profiles functions, including:
- Alignment
- Fold Adjustment; this feature is displayed if the optional finisher is attached
- Finishing Devices: This option is available only if an optional, third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) device is attached to your system. This feature allows you to choose specific settings for that attached DFA device.
For detailed information and instructions on the various Administrator functions, refer to the System Administration Guide.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses5-2 User Guide
System Administrator overview
6 Paper information
Loading media in Trays 1 and 2
Loading paper
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up. 4. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray. 5. Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray. 6. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
7. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 8. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
9. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
10. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Loading tab stock
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Fan the tab paper before loading into the tray.
6-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
4. Load and align the edge of the tab paper against the right edge of the tray in the LEF direction as shown in following illustration:
5. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
6. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
8. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
9. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Loading transparencies
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Fan the transparencies to stop them from sticking together before loading into the
tray. 4. Load transparencies on top of a small stack of same-size paper and align the edge
of the transparency against the right edge of the as shown in following illustration:
5. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
6. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
8. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
9. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses6-2 User Guide
Paper information
Loading pre-drilled stock for 1-sided print jobs
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up. 4. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray. 5. Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for
LEF direction:
6. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
7. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 8. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
9. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
10. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Loading pre-drilled stock for 2-sided print jobs
Load drilled paper into any tray in either Long Edge Feed (LEF) or Short Edge Feed (SEF) direction. 1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up. 4. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
6-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Paper information
5. Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for LEF direction:
6. Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for SEF direction:
7. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
8. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 9. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
10. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
11. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses6-4 User Guide
Paper information
Skew adjustment levers The skew adjustment levers are found in all paper trays. These levers are used to improve paper feed accuracy and to reduce paper skew problems.
1. Rear skew adjustment lever
2. Right-side skew adjustment lever
These levers should remain in their default position. The position of these levers should be changed only when there is a skew problem when running a specific print job and/or specific media type.
Changing the skew adjustment levers from their default position may cause more skew problems when running certain media types, such as coated, label, transparency, and film.
Use the following procedure to set the skew adjustment levers. 1. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 2. Slide the rear skew adjustment lever to the right. 3. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop. 4. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size,
type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option. 5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window. 6. Run your print job.
The paper is fed accurately without skew and the printed output is satisfactory; your task is complete.
The paper is skewed and the printed output is unsatisfactory; proceed to the next step.
7. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 8. Return the rear skew adjustment lever to its left, default position.
6-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Paper information
9. Slide the right-side skew adjustment lever toward the front of the paper tray. 10. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop. 11. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size,
type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option. 12. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window. 13. Run your print job.
The paper is fed accurately without skew and the printed output is satisfactory; your task is complete.
The paper is skewed and the printed output is unsatisfactory; proceed to the next step.
14. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 15. Return the right-side skew adjustment lever toward the rear of the paper tray; this is
its default position. 16. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop. 17. If you are still having skew adjustment problems, refer to the Advanced Stock Setup
information located in the System Administration Guide.
Tray Properties From the Tray Properties window the user can view and select a variety of functions on the paper tray. Selections available for the tray vary depending on whether the user is logged in as Operator or Administrator. The following information represents the selections available when logged in as Operator.
Stock Details: This area displays the current tray information including the paper size, type, weight, color, and orientation of the paper (LEF or SEF).
- Comment: This section allows the user to enter information about the paper, such as a brand name or job-specific information. A maximum of 256 characters is allowed.
- Long Edge Feed/Short Edge Feed (LEF/SEF): Indicates the orientation direction that the paper is loaded in the tray: either in the LEF or SEF direction.
Enable Tray: Permits the selected tray to be used. Disable Tray: Prohibits the selected tray to be used.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses6-6 User Guide
Paper information
Override:
- When this selection is cleared, the UI displays a message if the current media loaded in the tray does not match the media information displayed on the Tray Properties window. The user must load the tray with the same media as indicated on the Tray Properties window.
- If selected, the UI never displays a message when there is a media mismatch between the actual tray contents and the information shown on the UI for that tray.
Display Tray Properties automatically when Tray is open: When selected, the Tray Properties window always opens when the tray is open.
Stock Library: This opens the Manage Stock Library window, which contains the names of all the paper stocks that were either created by the user or copied and/or edited from the Recommended Media List (RML). The user selects a desired stock from the list, and that stock is assigned to the tray.
Recommended Media List (RML): Provides a list of all the default, preprogrammed stocks that are available for the machine. The user can select a stock from the RML to assign temporarily to the tray. Once the Tray Properties window is closed, the stock appears name appears in blue/italics indicating that it is a temporary stock. The stock is deleted once a different stock is selected.
Create New Stock: Allows the user to create a new stock that is assigned to the tray. This stock may be saved permanently to the stock library, or it can remain as a temporary stock.
Alignment Profile: Allows the user to keep the system default profile or, from this button, select a specific profile that was created and saved from the Administrator mode.
Related Topics:
Manage Stock Library
Advanced Stock Setup options
Recommended Media List (RML)
Creating a new stock (from Tray Properties)
Tray stock mismatch If the paper loaded in a tray does not match the information on the Tray Properties window, the UI may alert you with a Stock Size Mismatch message.
Note This functionality is available only if it is enabled by the Administrator: refer to the System Administration Guide for more information.
6-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Paper information
If you receive this message, do the following: 1. Load the stock indicated on the Tray Stock Size Mismatch window, or 2. Change the Tray Properties to match the contents of the tray.
a) Verify the paper size, type (coated, uncoated), and weight of the paper loaded in the tray.
b) Enter that information on the Tray Properties window.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses6-8 User Guide
Paper information
7 Manage Stock Library
The Stock Library enables you to define attributes for a stock (such as size, color, type, and weight) and assign a name to identify the stock and its associated attributes.
Selecting the Stock Library button opens the Manage Stock Library window.
Note The appearance of the Stock Library button on the UI is dependent on how the administrator sets this feature in System Settings (while logged on in the Administrator mode). If the Stock Library button is not displayed on the UI, then the administrator has restricted its access to administrators only. In this case, contact your administrator for more information and/or refer to the System Administration Guide.
The Manage Stock Library window contains the Recommended Media List (RML) and the Stock Library list:
Recommended Media List (RML): This list contains the names of all the preprogrammed stocks that are available for the machine.
Stock Library: Much like the RML, this list contains the names of all the stocks that are available for the machine. Unlike the RML, this is a list of stocks that were either created by the user or copied and/or edited from the Recommended Media List (RML). The user selects a desired stock for each tray and/or for specific print jobs.
Related Topics:
Stock management
Recommended Media List (RML)
Manage Stock Library window
7-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Recommended Media List (RML) Always refer to the Recommended Media List for paper guidelines. The Recommended Media List is updated as required to include new papers and other media. The RML is available at www.xerox.com.
The RML is also available on your machine either through the Tray Properties window or from the Stock Library feature.
Stock management Once a stock type is defined, named, and saved as a new stock, it can be easily referenced from the Stock Library. A saved stock can be quickly selected and used for a desired paper tray or print job.
You can perform the following tasks from the Manage Stock Library window:
Add a stock from the RML to the Stock Library
Copy RML stocks and customize those stock properties as required Copy an existing stock in the Stock Library and customize the stock properties as
required Edit/change an existing stock entry Create and save a new stock; these stocks can be created in one of two ways:
- From Manage Stock Library
- From Tray Properties
Remove/delete a stock entry Change the order stocks are shown by moving a stock up/down in the Stock Library
list
Manage Stock Library window The Manage Stock Library window consists of the Recommended Media List (RML), Stock Library list, and the following:
Default Layout: Select this option to return the Stock Library view to its original layout.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses7-2 User Guide
Manage Stock Library
Properties: Allows the user to view and/or change the properties of stocks listed in the Stock Library list. The stock name cannot be edited/changed. Properties of a stock in the RML can be viewed only; the properties CANNOT be changed.
Create New: Allows the user to create and save a new stock to the Stock Library list. Copy: Allows the user to copy an existing stock from either the RML or the Stock
Library list, edit the stock properties, and save it to the Stock Library as a new stock. Help: Select this to get online Help information about the Manage Stock Library
feature. Remove: Allows the user to delete (remove) a stock from the Stock Library list. Add to Stock Library: Allows the user to add a stock from the RML to the Stock Library
list. Sorting: Select either Use Columns or Sort Manually. Up/down buttons: Moves a stock up or down in the Stock Library list. Close: Closes/exits the Manage Stock Library window.
Related Topics:
Adding a stock entry
Copying a stock entry
Creating a new stock (from Manage Stock Library)
Creating a new stock (from Tray Properties)
Editing an existing stock in the Stock Library
Removing a stock from the Stock Library
Adding a stock entry
Use the following procedure when adding a stock to the Stock Library from the Manage Stock Library window.
Note Only preexisting stocks from the RML can be added to the Stock Library.
1. Select Stock Library. The Manage Stock Library window opens.
2. Select the desired stock from the RML. 3. Select the Add Stock Library button.
The RML stock is added to the bottom of the Stock Library list.
4. Use the Up/Down buttons to move the stock within the Stock Library List. 5. Select Close to exit Manage Stock Library.
7-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Manage Stock Library
Copying a stock entry
Sometimes an existing stock entry (either from the RML or the Stock Library list) already contains most of the attributes required for a new stock entry. In this case, the user simply copies an existing stock and modifies its attributes to create a new stock entry. 1. Select Stock Library.
The Manage Stock Library window opens.
2. Select the desired stock from either the RML or the Stock Library list. 3. Select the Copy button.
The Stock Properties window opens. 4. Type a new stock name and modify the attributes as required. 5. Select the Advanced Setup button.
a) Select the various Advanced Stock Setup options as required. b) Select OK to save any selections made and close the Advanced Stock Setup window.
6. Select OK to save and close the Stock Properties window. The stock is added to the bottom of the Stock Library List.
7. Use the Up/Down buttons to move the stock within the Stock Library List. 8. Select Close to exit Manage Stock Library.
Related Topics:
Advanced Stock Setup options
Create/modify Advanced Stock Setup options
Creating a new stock (from Manage Stock Library) 1. Select Stock Library.
The Manage Stock Library window opens.
2. Select the Create New button. The New Stock Setup window opens.
3. Type a new stock name and modify the attributes as required. 4. Select the Advanced Setup button.
a) Select the various Advanced Stock Setup options as required. b) Select OK to save any selections made and close the Advanced Stock Setup window.
5. Select OK to save and close the New Stock Setup window. The stock is added to the bottom of the Stock Library List.
6. Use the Up/Down buttons to move the stock within the Stock Library List. 7. Select Close to exit Manage Stock Library.
Related Topics:
Advanced Stock Setup options
Create/modify Advanced Stock Setup options
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses7-4 User Guide
Manage Stock Library
Creating a new stock (from Tray Properties)
Creating a new stock (from Tray Properties) 1. From the machines UI, double-click on the desired tray where the new stock will be
loaded. The Tray Properties window for that tray opens.
2. Select the Create New button. The New Stock Setup window opens.
3. Type a new stock name and modify the attributes as required. 4. Select the Advanced Setup button.
a) Select the various Advanced Stock Setup options as required. b) Select OK to save any selections made and close the Advanced Stock Setup window.
5. The stock may be either a temporary stock or a permanent stock in the Stock Library:
To make the stock a temporary stock, ensure that the Save In Stock Library checkbox is UNCHECKED.
To permanently save the stock to the Stock Library, ensure that the Save In Stock Library checkbox is CHECKED.
6. Select OK to save and close the New Stock Setup window. 7. Select OK again to close the Tray Properties window.
The new stock is displayed on the UI.
Note Before running the job, be sure to load the tray with the same stock as programmed.
Related Topics:
Tray Properties
Advanced Stock Setup options
Create/modify Advanced Stock Setup options
Creating a new stock (from Manage Stock Library)
Editing an existing stock in the Stock Library
Use the following procedure to edit an existing stock in the Stock Library. 1. Select Stock Library.
The Manage Stock Library window opens.
2. Select the desired stock from the Stock Library list. 3. Select the Properties button.
The Stock Properties window opens.
4. Modify the attributes as required. 5. Select the Advanced Setup button.
7-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Manage Stock Library
a) Select the various Advanced Stock Setup options as required. b) Select OK to save any selections made and close the Advanced Stock Setup window.
6. Select OK to save the changes to the stock and close the Stock Properties window. 7. Select Close to exit Manage Stock Library.
Related Topics:
Advanced Stock Setup options
Create/modify Advanced Stock Setup options
Removing a stock from the Stock Library
Use the following procedure to remove a stock from the Stock Library list. 1. Select Stock Library.
The Manage Stock Library window opens.
2. Select the desired stock from the Stock Library list. 3. Select the Remove button.
A question window opens and asks Are you sure you want to Delete this stock? Select Yes to delete the stock from the Stock Library list.
4. Select Close to exit Manage Stock Library.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses7-6 User Guide
Manage Stock Library
8 Advanced Stock Setup
The Advanced Stock Setup feature allows the user to further customize stocks beyond the typical size, weight, type, and other characteristics.
The Advanced Stock Setup feature is accessed from either the Stock Properties window or the New Stock Setup window. The Paper Curl Correction Settings are displayed only when logged in as system administrator.
Different media (including paper type, weight, and coating/uncoating, paper curl) may require specific and/or special handling by the machine as it is moving through the paper path. For example, some media types may skew or curl as they progress through the printing path of the machine. This may occur on frequently-run jobs and/or on jobs with a high volume output.
8-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
The Advanced Stock Setup feature allows you set specific custom parameters for different types of media and jobs, such as outlined in the above paragraph. These custom stocks may be used at point of need in order to ensure optimum output quality of your prints/jobs. The stocks may be either a temporary stock for a specific, one-time job, or they can be a permanent stock added to the Stock Library list.
By setting custom stocks for specific media types, you can avoid output prints that are skewed, curled, have too much dry ink/toner or not enough dry ink/toner in areas, or images that are not registered properly on the output print, such as Side 1 and/or Side 2 images that are misregistered.
Note Once a custom stock is created, either temporarily or permanently, the machine passes this information on to your print server. The print server in turn reflects this information in the print options for the print jobs.
Related Topics:
Advanced Stock Setup options
Stock By Name Only
Multifeed Detection
Near Empty Detection Level
Tray Air Assist
Enable Tray Heater
Aligner Roll Pressure
Second (2nd) bias transfer roll
Fuser Temperature
Fold Adjustment Profile
Create/modify Advanced Stock Setup options
Advanced Stock Setup options The Advanced Stock Setup feature includes options that affect these areas of the machine:
Paper tray/paper feed, including:
- Stock By Name Only
- Near Empty Detection Level
- Tray Air Assist
- Multifeed Detection
- Enable Tray Heater
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses8-2 User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
Paper path/paper transportation, including:
- Aligner Roll Pressure
- 2nd Bias Transfer Roll
- Fuser Temperature
Folder Adjustment Profile
Each of these options is discussed throughout the remainder of this section, and where required, step-by-step procedures also are provided.
Important Paper Curl Correction options and the ability to run test prints are available ONLY when logged in as Administrator. Refer to the System Administrator Guide for detailed information.
Related Topics:
Stock By Name Only
Multifeed Detection
Near Empty Detection Level
Tray Air Assist
Enable Tray Heater
Aligner Roll Pressure
Second (2nd) bias transfer roll
Fuser Temperature
Fold Adjustment Profile
Create/modify Advanced Stock Setup options
Tips for using Advanced Stock Setup options
Before using any of the Advanced Stock Setup options, keep the following information in mind:
It is recommended that you choose only one option at a time. This helps you determine whether or not that option is providing the desired printed output.
Important It is HIGHLY recommended that you run test prints after selecting each Advanced Stock option. This allows you to evaluate the printed output and determine if it is acceptable or not. In order to run test prints, you MUST be logged on as Administrator.
If you determine that the output is unacceptable, either further adjust the value for a particular option (if applicable) or return the option to its default value and continue to the next option.
8-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
It is important to remember that any settings for a particular option that is used today for a specific print job may not achieve the same desired outcome/output when used on different day for that same print job. This is especially relevant if the room in which the machine is located experiences changes in temperature and humidity.
If you determine that your output still is unacceptable after repeating procedures, log in as Administrator, select the desired options and run test prints. Repeat this process several times, each time running test prints and evaluating the output. If the output is still unacceptable, call your Customer Support Center for help/assistance.
Create/modify Advanced Stock Setup options
Use the following procedure to select the various Advanced Stock Setup options for a new stock entry or to modify/edit an existing stock entry. 1. Perform one of the following:
a) Create a new stock entry (from the Manage Stock Library window), or b) Copy an existing stock entry (either from the Manage Stock Library window or
from the Tray Properties window), or c) Modify an existing stock entry (from the Manage Stock Library window) by
selecting the Properties button.
2. From either the New Stock Setup or Stock Properties window, select/modify the attributes as required, including entering a new stock name (if applicable).
3. Select the Advanced Setup button. The Advanced Stock Setup window opens.
4. Select the various options as required, including: a) Stock By Name Only b) Multifeed Detection c) 2nd Bias Transfer Roll; refer to the Selecting the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll settings
procedure for step-by-step instructions d) Fuser Temperature e) Near Empty Detection Level f) Aligner Roll Pressure g) Tray Air Assist h) Fold Adjustment Profile (available only if the optional finisher is attached to your
machine)
5. Select OK to close the Advanced Stock Setup window. 6. Select OK to save and close either the New Stock Setup window or the Stock Properties
window. 7. Select Close to exit Manage Stock Library.
Related Topics:
Stock By Name Only
Multifeed Detection
Near Empty Detection Level
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses8-4 User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
Tray Air Assist
Enable Tray Heater
Aligner Roll Pressure
Second (2nd) bias transfer roll
Fuser Temperature
Fold Adjustment Profile
Selecting the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll settings
Paper tray/paper feed options
Stock By Name Only
When this option is selected/checked (yes or true), stock can be selected from the print server or from the clients print driver only by explicitly selecting its specific stock name (as shown in the Stock Library) and not by matching various parameters (such as weight, type, and coating). Selecting this option (placing a checkmark in the box) prevents the inadvertent use of expensive or specialty stocks for slip-sheets, automatic paper selection, or generic paper requests by the user.
When this option is unchecked (no or false), stocks can be selected from the print server or from the clients print driver by matching the same attributes (such as weight, type, and coating) as those listed for stocks in the Stock Library. Stock names also examined, but are not used exclusively for selection for print jobs.
Multifeed Detection
This option is used in vary rare cases, such as when a job requires the same paper tray to have different media stocks loaded in it. For example, a job requires a special application with heavier stock media:
Tray 1 is loaded with both 24 lb./90 gsm and 130 lb. Cover (350 gsm) The print job pulls both stocks from the same tray for the same job. With Multifeed Detection selected, the machine detects and avoids any possible
multifeed issues. This allows the job to continue running, pulling both stocks from the same tray, and completes the print job without faults or jams.
8-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
Near Empty Detection Level
This option is available only if the Tray Near Empty option is selected for the Auto Tray Switch Timing feature ( System Settings > Tray Options); otherwise, this option is ignored. When available, this option informs the user that a tray is nearing an empty level. This message is displayed to the user depending on where the Near Empty Detection Level indicator is set.
Antiqued Image Effect
This option is available only for a textured/embossed stock type. It is used to provide an aged or faded look to the entire image.
Tray Air Assist
The Tray Air Assist option allows you to optimize and control the environmental conditions in your paper trays, which in turn ensures optimum print capability.
Use this feature to switch on/off fans in a paper tray in order to eliminate misfeeds, multifeeds, paper jams, or other possible tray feeding problems. These fans blow air to the paper stack during the feeding operation and separate sheets of paper thereby providing a stable feed of paper.
The Tray Air Assist options includes the following selections:
System Default: As its name states, this is the default selection. With this selection the paper tray blowers automatically adjust by using system settings that are optimized for Xerox papers.
Multifeed Support Table: Select this option when you have a multifeed condition. This changes the air assist function to lower the air volume so it does not fluff or pick up as many sheets of paper. This is a preset lower volume that is already stored in the machine NVM (NonVolatile Memory).
Mis-Feed Support Table: Select this option when you have a misfeed condition. This changes the air assist function to lower the air volume so that it may reduce paper jams. This is also a preset lower air volume that is stored in the machine NVM.
Forced Off: Select this option when neither of the above options produce a change in the output. This option switches off all air assist functions.
Custom 1-8: By default, these are blank NVM storage settings. If necessary, they are used to create a custom air assist parameter. If none of the other options remedy the situation, your Xerox representative works with both the customer and the Xerox personnel to create a custom setting. This is based on the stock being used and the best air assist values for producing the desired outcome. These values are then entered into the machine NVM and assigned to a specific Custom setting (1-8).
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses8-6 User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
Enable Tray Heater
The Enable Tray Heater option works in conjunction with the Tray Air Assist option. Checking this box, enables the tray heater. The heater maintains the appropriate internal temperature of the paper tray. Depending on the external temperature and humidity, the heater sends information to the tray blowers. The paper tray blowers then switch on and provide the required air to the paper stack, thereby preventing multifeeds or misfeeds from occurring.
Paper path/paper transportation options
Aligner Roll Pressure
Use this option with special paper types that slip or skew thereby causing image misregistration on the printed output. This feature is also used with some light-weight or heavy-weight paper stocks that require less or more roll pressure in order to avoid edge damage to the printed output.
Examples:
Some coated, heavier paper types slip and skew, thereby misregistering the image on the output prints. In this case, you may want to increase the roll pressure in order to compensate for the slippage and skewing.
Some light-weight papers may have too much roll pressure applied to them, thereby causing edge damage to the output prints. In this case, you may to decrease the roll pressure.
Tip Increasing the roll pressure for some faults, may allow you to postpone a service call. However, you may want to call your service representative as soon as possible in order to restore the machine to its full feeding capabilities.
Note The default setting is 0. It is recommended that you leave this option at its default setting until you run test prints and evaluate the output of the prints.
Important Changing the default setting should be considered a temporary solution because environmental conditions vary from day to day. It is recommended that upon completion of the print job, you return the option to its default setting.
8-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
Second (2nd) bias transfer roll
The second bias transfer roll is where the image is transferred from the belt to the paper. The 2nd Bias Transfer Roll (2nd BTR) option is normally used with special stocks like heavier weight paper, such as 220 gsm and greater, 10 pt, or 12 pt. However there are times when it is also used with lighter weight paper as well. When using either heavier or lighter weight paper, you may want or need to adjust Side 1 for all 1-sided jobs.
If defects continually occur in a printed job when using heavier weight paper, check the following areas on your printed output to determine if 2nd Bias Transfer Roll (2nd BTR) adjustments (side 1 and/or side 2) are appropriate. 1. If the job is printed face down or 1-N, check Side 1 for defects on the topside (upper
portion) of the stacked sheets, and check Side 2 for defects on the downside (lower portion) of the stacked sheets.
2. If the job is printed face up or N-1, check Side 2 for defects on the topside (upper portion) of the stacked sheets, and check Side 1 for the downside (lower portion) of the stacked sheets.
Note The default setting for both Sides 1 and 2 is 100%. It is recommended that you leave this option at its default setting until you run test prints and evaluate the output of the prints.
Tip Test prints may be run in order to check the printed output before saving the changes made to the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll option. However, in order to run test prints, you must be logged in as Administrator. The Test Print option is available ONLY in the Administrator mode.
Related Topics:
Mottle
Color shift
Selecting the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll settings
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses8-8 User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
Mottle
Use the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll option when your prints have mottle, which is uneven spotty dry ink/toner coverage that occurs when printing large, solid areas of flat color. Refer to the following illustration for an example of prints with and without mottle.
1. No mottle 2. Mottle
If mottle exists, increase one or both of the 2nd BTR values. Evaluate the image quality. If the image quality is equal to or worse than the 100% default setting, decrease one or both of the 2nd BTR values until a satisfactory image quality is obtained.
8-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
Color shift
Use the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll option when your prints have color shift where the colors are much different than what you desire. Refer to the following illustration for an example of prints with and without color shift.
1. No color shift: this is the desired output 2. Color shift: this is an undesired output
If color shift exists, increase one or both of the 2nd BTR values.
Important Changing the default setting should be considered a temporary solution because environmental conditions vary from day to day. It is recommended that upon completion of the print job, you return the option to its default setting.
Selecting the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll settings
Use the following procedure to select the settings for the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll (on the Advanced Stock Setup window). 1. Select Stock Library.
The Manage Stock Library window opens.
2. Perform one of the following: a) Select the Create New button or b) Select the desired stock from either the RML or the Stock Library list, and then
select the Copy button or c) Select the desired stock from the Stock Library list, and then select the Properties
button. Either the New Stock Setup window or the Stock Properties window opens.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses8-10 User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
3. Modify the attributes as required. 4. Select the Advanced Setup button.
The Advanced Stock Setup window opens. 5. Select the desired 2nd Bias Transfer Roll settings for Side 1 and/or Side 2 as required
by using the up/down arrow buttons. 6. Select OK to close the Advanced Stock Setup window. 7. Select OK to save and close either the New Stock Setup window or the Stock Properties
window. 8. Select Close to exit Manage Stock Library.
Fuser Temperature
This option allows the user to adjust the fuser temperature for specific media types.
Adjusting the fuser temperature allows the machine to maintain the highest productivity possible when running mixed media jobs, and thereby allows the fuser belt and related components to be cooled rapidly when switching from heavy-weight paper to lighter-weight paper.
In order to maintain the highest productivity possible when running mixed media jobs, the fuser and its related components need to be cooled rapidly when switching from heavy weight paper to lighter weight paper. The technology of this fuser and its related components provide this rapid heating and cooling, thereby ensuring the highest productivity on printed output, especially when running mixed media jobs.
Under most conditions, the fuser temperature is adjusted automatically by the machine at point of need. On those very rare occasions, however, the user may need to minimally adjust the fuser temperature for specific stock weights or a specific job flow (such as running heavy weight cover stock with lighter weight paper).
The Fuser Temperature option allows the user to increase or decrease the fuser temperature by -10 to +10 degrees Celsius (-18 to +18 degrees Fahrenheit).
Note The default setting is 0. It is recommended that you leave this option at its default setting until you run test prints and evaluate the output of the prints.
Tip Changing the default setting should be considered a temporary solution because environmental conditions vary from day to day. It is recommended that upon completion of the print job, you return the option to its default setting.
8-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
Fold Adjustment Profile This option allows you to select a desired fold adjustment profile.
Note This option is available only if your machine has the optional Standard Finisher, Booklet Maker Finisher, or Standard Finisher Plus attached to it.
From the Fold Adjustment Profile pull-down menu, select the desired profile, as required. These profiles are preset profiles, which are created and maintained from the Profiles feature on the UI.
Note Refer to the Profiles chapter of the System Administration Guide for detailed information.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses8-12 User Guide
Advanced Stock Setup
9 Maintenance
Cleaning procedures If the exterior surfaces require cleaning, dampen a paper towel or a soft, clean cloth with a liquid, nonabrasive glass cleaner or water.
Caution Do not use any other cleaners or solvents on the machine as they may interact with the paint on the covers, eventually causing the paint to peel.
Caution Do not pour or spray liquid directly into any of the paper trays. Always apply the liquid to the cloth first.
Cleaning the UI screen
Clean the UI screen at the start of each day. Remove all dust and fingerprints by wiping the screen with a clean, lint-free cloth.
Caution To avoid damage, do not use any Xerox cleaner, water, or commercial cleaner on the screen.
Cleaning the paper path
Note It is recommended that you perform the following procedures on a daily basis, preferably at the start of the day before the machine is switched on and the fuser is cool. Only clean the recommended areas of the paper path as described in these procedures.
9-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Warning If the machine is switched on and the fuser is hot, be sure to switch off the machine power and allow 30 minutes for the fuser to cool before performing this procedure.
Note If large amounts of paper dust are frequently observed, contact your Xerox supplies representative for alternate paper recommendations. If a Xerox analysis determines that persistent paper contamination is due to cut papers or the use of non-recommended material, the customer may be liable for any extended costs that fall outside the scope of their service contract.
Cleaning the paper path area 2
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine left side).
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-2 User Guide
Maintenance
2. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration.
a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
3. Return all the green levers to their original positions. 4. Close the left and right front doors (print engine left side).
9-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
Cleaning the paper path areas 3 and 4
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine left side).
2. Grasp handle 3 and rotate it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Slowly pull out the paper transport drawer until it stops.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-4 User Guide
Maintenance
4. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration.
a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
5. Return all the green levers to their original positions. 6. Using a lint-free cloth, clean the belts in Area 3 by rotating them in the direction that
paper travels.
Continue to wipe the belts as you rotate them until all the belts are clean.
Note Do not rotate the belts with your bare hands as this will leave grease and dirt on them and may create paper jams. Rotate the belts by using a lint-free cloth.
7. Grasp handle 3 and slowly push in the paper transport drawer until it stops. Turn the handle in the direction of the arrow to lock the module in place.
9-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
8. Using a lint-free cloth, clean the belts in Area 4 by rotating them in the direction that paper travels.
Continue to wipe the belts as you rotate them until all the belts are clean.
Note Do not rotate the belts with your bare hands as this will leave grease and dirt on them and may create paper jams. Rotate the belts by using a lint-free cloth.
9. Close the left and right front doors (print engine left side).
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-6 User Guide
Maintenance
Cleaning the paper path area 5
1. Open the left front door (print engine right side).
2. Grasp handle 5 and rotate it in the direction of the arrow, and slowly pull out the fuser until it stops.
9-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
3. Using a lint-free cloth, clean the belts in Area 5 (left side) by rotating them in the direction that paper travels.
Continue to wipe the belts as you rotate them until all the belts are clean.
Note Do not rotate the belts with your bare hands as this will leave grease and dirt on them and may create paper jams. Rotate the belts by using a lint-free cloth.
4. Using a lint-free cloth, clean the belts in Area 5 (right side) by rotating them in the direction that paper travels.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-8 User Guide
Maintenance
Continue to wipe the belts as you rotate them until all the belts are clean.
Note Do not rotate the belts with your bare hands as this will leave grease and dirt on them and may create paper jams. Rotate the belts by using a lint-free cloth.
5. Grasp handle 5 and gently push in the fuser until it stops. 6. Close the left front door (print engine right side).
Cleaning the paper path area 6
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine right side).
9-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
2. Grasp handle 6 and rotate it in the direction of the arrow, and slowly pull out the exit drawer assembly until it stops.
3. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration.
Note Avoid touching the White Reference Roll when cleaning area 6.
a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
4. Return lever 6b to its original position.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-10 User Guide
Maintenance
5. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration.
a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
6. Return lever 6c to its original position. 7. Return lever 6d to its original position. 8. Grasp handle 6 and gently push in the exit drawer assembly until it stops. 9. Rotate handle 6 in the direction of the arrow to lock the exit drawer assembly in
place. 10. Close the left front door (print engine right side).
9-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
Cleaning the paper path area 7
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine right side).
2. Lift lever 7g and move it to right.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-12 User Guide
Maintenance
3. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration. a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
4. Return lever 7g to its original position. 5. Grasp lever 7f and move it downward.
6. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration. a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
7. Return lever 7f to its original position. 8. Grasp lever 7d and move it to the left.
9. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration. a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
10. Return lever 7d to its original position.
9-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
11. Grasp lever 7e and move it downward.
12. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration. a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
13. Return lever 7e to its original position. 14. Lift lever 7c.
15. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration. a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
16. Return lever 7c to its original position.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-14 User Guide
Maintenance
17. Lift lever 7b.
18. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration. a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
19. Return lever 7b to its original position. 20. Grasp lever 7a and move it to the left. 21. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the paper path only
in the green lever jam clearance areas as shown in the illustration. a) Open each area and clean the surfaces of the green-handle areas. b) Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth.
22. Return lever 7a to its original position. 23. Close the left front door (print engine right side).
Replacing consumable supplies
Consumable supplies
Xerox supplies, paper, and throughput material can be ordered from Xerox by going to www.xerox.com and clicking on either the Contact Us link for specific contact information/telephone numbers in your area or by clicking on the Supplies and entering/selecting your specific machine information (product family and model type).
Note Always refer to www.xerox.com for the latest Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) part numbers.
Store supply items and Xerox parts in their original packages in a convenient location.
9-15Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
The following items are consumables for this machine. It is recommended that you have a supply of these items available to eliminate downtime when they need to be replaced.
Approximate Print Yield/Carton (Full Color Prints)
Supply Unit Shipped with machine/Reorder Quantity
Supply Item
50K1/boxDry Ink/Toner Cartridge (Black)
55K1/boxDry Ink/Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
51K1/boxDry Ink/Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
55K1/boxDry Ink/Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
55K1/boxDry Ink/Toner Cartridge (Clear)
55K1/boxDry Ink/Toner Cartridge (Gold)
55K1/boxDry Ink/Toner Cartridge (Silver)
120k1Dry Ink/Toner Waste Bottle
400K1Fuser Web Assembly
Note
Dry Ink/Toner yield projections are based on 7.5 percent area coverage per color (4 colors = 30 percent) at standardized conditions on A4 (8.5 x 11 in.) Xerox Digital Color Xpressions+, 24 lb. (90 g/m2) and Colotech Plus 90 g/m2 reference paper. Actual yields vary greatly, depending on color intensity, area coverage, paper stock, and run mode selected.
Please call your Xerox service representative to reorder the Dry Ink/Toner Bottle Waste, the Fuser Web Assembly, and any of the charge corotron units. These parts are provided to you at no charge when ordered by a Xerox service representative.
Important The charge corotrons can only be replaced by a trained, qualified Technical Key Operator (TKO).
Replacing a dry ink/toner cartridge
Note Dry ink/toner cartridges include Black (K), Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and any optional cartridges that were purchased. Optional cartridges are the Clear Dry Ink, Gold Dry Ink, or Silver Dry Ink located in the 5th housing compartment.
Note When replacing a 5th color cartridge , the TKO will enable the changed color.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-16 User Guide
Maintenance
Caution To prevent spillage, remove dry ink/toner cartridges only when the Replace the Dry Ink Cartridge message is displayed on the UI.
1. Place a drop cloth below the dry ink/toner area. 2. On the print engine left side, open the upper right and/or upper left door(s).
3. Rotate the cartridge to the unlock position, as shown in the following illustration.
4. Remove and dispose of the empty cartridge according to local regulations.
Tip Do not use warm or hot water, or cleaning solvents, to remove dry ink/toner from your skin or clothing. This will set the dry ink/toner and make it difficult to remove. If any dry ink/toner gets on your skin or clothing, use a brush to remove it, blow it off, or wash it off with cold water and mild soap.
5. Remove a new cartridge from the box. 6. Vigorously shake and/or slap the new cartridge with your hand until the Dry Ink/Toner
is completely loosened.
9-17Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
Caution Dry ink/toner settles and compacts during shipping and must be loosened before inserting the cartridge into the machine. Failure to completely loosen the material may cause damage to the gear at the end of the cartridge.
7. To install the new cartridge, insert it into the compartment with the arrow at the top and gently push it in as far as it will.
Caution If more than one cartridge needs to be replaced at the same time, ensure that the cartridges are replaced in their correct color locations.
8. Rotate the cartridge to the lock position. 9. On the print engine left side, close the upper right and/or upper left door(s).
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-18 User Guide
Maintenance
Dry ink/toner waste bottle
The dry ink/toner waste bottle collects the waste dry ink/toner that occurs during the printing process. The machine contains two dry ink/toner waste bottles which are both located in the rear of the machine.
When a waste bottle is full, a message appears on the UI advising you when to replace the bottle. Since there is a second waste bottle, the machine continues to run as long as that second waste bottle is not full. This allows you to exchange the full bottle with an empty one while the machine continues to print.
9-19Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
Replacing a dry ink/toner waste bottle
Note When removing a full dry ink/toner waste bottle, SLOWLY pull it out of the machine. This will prevent any dry ink/toner from from spilling out of a full waste bottle.
1. Open the dry ink/toner waste bottle panel at the rear of the machine.
2. Grasp the handle of the full bottle and pull it out of the machine.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-20 User Guide
Maintenance
3. Lift the full bottle out of the machine.
4. Remove the cap from the cap holder on the side of the full bottle, and press the cap securely into the open hole on the top of the full bottle.
5. Dispose of the full bottle according to your local regulations. 6. Remove a new, empty bottle from the carton and insert it into the machine. 7. Gently push the new bottle into the machine. 8. Close the dry ink/toner waste bottle panel at the rear of the machine.
Replacing the fuser web assembly
Two messages will display on the UI regarding the fuser web assembly. The first advises you that the web is almost used up and you should be sure to have a new unit on hand. The second message displays when the fuser web is completely used and you must replace it. When this message displays, the machine shuts down and will not print until the web is replaced.
9-21Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
Warning Be careful when clearing jams in the fuser area, the fuser is extremely hot and will cause injury.
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine right side).
2. Grasp handle 5 and rotate it in the direction of the arrow, and slowly pull out the fuser until it stops.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-22 User Guide
Maintenance
3. Push down on the lever; the fuser exit area opens.
4. Grasp the handles on the fuser web assembly and pull it up and out to remove the assembly.
Dispose of the old fuser web assembly according to your local regulations. 5. Remove the new fuser web assembly from the box and the protective covering. 6. Hold the assembly by the handles with both hands and insert the assembly into the
fuser.
9-23Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Maintenance
7. Close the fuser exit area.
8. Grasp handle 5 and gently push in the fuser until it stops. 9. Rotate handle 5 in the direction of the arrow to lock the fuser module in place.
10. Close the left and right front doors (print engine right side). 11. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses9-24 User Guide
Maintenance
10 Problem solving
Locating the machine serial number The machine serial number can be accessed from either the machine UI or by locating it on the inside of the machine.
Related Topics:
Calling for service
Machine serial number on the UI
The machines serial number can be found from the UI selecting System > Machine Details.
Serial number on the machine
If the machine loses power and it is impossible to access the Machine Details tab, the serial number can be found on the machine frame on the lower left side.
10-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Use the following procedure to find the serial number on the machine. 1. Open the left front door (print engine left side). 2. Locate the machine serial number frame on the lower left side. 3. Close the left front door (print engine left side).
Calling for service 1. Record any displayed fault codes. 2. Record the machine serial number by selecting System > Machine Details . (If the
serial number is not displayed, open the right/left front doors on the print engine left side. The serial number is on a white label on the machines frame.
3. If output quality is a problem, take a sample as a reference to assist you in describing the problem over the telephone when answering the questions from the customer support operator about the defects.
4. If possible, use a phone near the machine when calling for assistance. Follow the instructions provided by the operator.
5. For system support, user help, and service support, call the appropriate number. For the specific number in your area, go to www.xerox.com and select the Support link.
Related Topics:
Locating the machine serial number
General problems If the machine has a loss of power and you cannot access the Machine Details screen to get the serial number, open the two main front doors. The serial number label is in the center of the bottom frame of the machine. If the problem persists after following all the instructions, contact your Xerox representative.
Note If your print server indicates that the machine has a fault and the UI does not readily display a message, select System > Machine Details, then select the Error Log tab to display the fault history.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-2 User Guide
Problem solving
Suggested solutionsProblem
The machine does not power on Ensure the power cord is plugged into the receptacle correctly.
Ensure the power switch inside the front door is set to the ON position.
Check the GFI circuit breakers. If the power in your location is working properly, you have tried
the suggested solutions, and the machine does not power on, contact the Customer Support Center for assistance.
Open the two main front doors. The serial number is located on the frame area above Trays 1 and 2 on the print engine left side.
There is no power to the machine and you cannot access the Machine Details screen to get the machine serial number.
The machine does not suc- cessfully complete a print job.
Is your machine connected to the network as a printer? Try printing a test page from your workstation to the machine to verify that the machine is connected on the network.
Verify that the power cable is connected to the machine and to a suitable power socket.
Verify that the network cables are attached securely to the machine and seated properly.
Clear out the print job from the print queue and re-send print job.
Power Off/On the machine to restart it.
Your machine may not be configured on the network. Contact your System Administrator to connect the machine to the net- work.
10-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Suggested solutionsProblem
The system requires approximately 2 minutes when switching print modes in order to make any necessary adjustments for the next
The machine is taking longer than one minute be- fore printing the next job. print job, including color-to-color registration, density, charge levels,
bias levels, or other adjustments.
The system has four print modes:
- 4 Color (YMCK: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black)
- 4 Color plus optional Clear, Gold OR Silver
- K (Black) Only
- Clear Only, Gold Only, or Silver Only
If the next print job is switching print modes, for example from black-only to 4-color, the system requires approximately 2 minutes to make any necessary adjustments.
During this time, the User Interface (UI) displays the Adjusting Image Quality message.
The next job begins printing once the system completes its adjustments.
Other information to remember includes:
From a cold start (power on or power saver), system takes less than 5 minutes to start printing.
From standby mode, system usually takes less than 1 minute to start printing.
After clearing a paper jam, the machines User Inter- face (UI) displays the mes- sage Charge Corotron device is not properly in- stalled.
The machine automatically cleans the charge corotron assem- blies every 1,000 prints.
If a paper jam occurs while the machine is performing a charge corotron cleaning, the cleaning process is interrupted and a message is displayed on the UI.
None of the charge coro- tron asssemblies were changed or touched.
To clear this message and resume printing, simply cancel out of the message.
Important The charge corotrons can only be replaced by a trained, qualified Technical Key Operator (TKO).
Prints are not on desired paper size Ensure that the proper paper is loaded in the paper trays.
Select the paper size, tray and weight through the machine options on your PC.
Ensure that the correct weight is set on the Tray Properties window.
Ensure that Fit to Paper or an equivalent selection is not se- lected in your print driver.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-4 User Guide
Problem solving
Suggested solutionsProblem
If a message appears on the UI, follow the instructions dis- played.
Ensure the proper paper is loaded correctly and not filled above the MAX line. Refer to The Recommended Materials List.
Turn the paper stack around and/or over in the selected paper tray.
Remove a few sheets from the top and the bottom of the stack in the paper tray.
Fan all four edges of the paper in the selected paper tray. Replace the paper in the selected paper tray with paper from
a new package. Remove any partially fed paper from the trays. Ensure the paper you are using had been stored properly.
Paper is misfed or wrinkles repeatedly
Select System > Restart User Interface. Select System > Shutdown System PC. After the System PC
shuts down, wait 15 seconds and restart it by pressing the on/off button on the PC.
If the problem persists, call the Customer Support Center.
The UI does not respond to a command
If the UI is locked up, and the mouse or keyboard do not work, press and hold the UI power button on the PC until the UI powers down. Wait 30 seconds and press the PC power button to reboot the UI.
The UI is locked up.
Verify that the UI monitor button is pressed and lit.
Verify that the PC UI monitor cable is seated properly into the back of the PC.
The UI monitor screen is blank.
Do not fill the paper trays above the MAX fill line indicator. Remove the paper from the tray and fan the sheets to separate
the joined sheets. Predrilled sheets may stick together at the holes. Remove the
paper from the tray and fan the sheets to separate the joined sheets.
Paper and transparencies may stick together if environmental conditions are too dry and cause excessive static. Increase the humidity level in the room to minimize static.
Gently fan transparencies to separate the sheets before you load them.
Multiple sheets feed from the paper trays
Ensure that the edge guides of the paper tray fit snugly against the paper stack.
Do not fill the paper trays above the MAX fill line indicator. Close the tray slowly to avoid shifting the paper stack.
Paper jams when exiting the Paper Trays
10-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Suggested solutionsProblem
When no other output device is present, the Offset Catch Tray can hold up to 500 sheets of 24 pound (90 g/m2) paper. Empty the catch tray when output approaches this limit to ensure continuous production.
Ensure the first sheet is not blocking the paper exit, particularly for 11 x 17 inch (A3) output.
Output jams when exiting the machine to the Offset Catch Tray
Paper curl may be a result of:
Ensure that the correct paper weight and paper type are selec- ted.
The mass of dry ink (toner) coverage on the print output - the greater the dry ink/toner mass, the greater the paper curl.
The paper weight and whether or not it is coated or uncoated. The humidity conditions at the machine. You can sometimes minimize curl problems by flipping the paper
over in the tray and making the copies again. If excessive curl is still present, use a heavier paper.
To ensure continuous production, empty the output device when the output approaches the maximum amount that the device can hold; refer to the specifications for that output device for output limit amount.
An attempt to print on thicker paper or on paper stock that is less sensitive to moisture.
Paper curl can be adjusted in the following ways:
When logged in as the System Administrator by using the Ad- vanced Stock Setup feature (Paper Curl Correction option); refer to the System Administration Guide for more information.
If you have the optional Interface Module (IM) attached, you can use the manual decurl buttons on the IMs control panel. Refer to the section later in this guide called Interface Module (IM).
If you have the optional Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher at- tached, you can use the manual decurl buttons on the finisher. Refer to the section later in this guide called Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher.
Excessive paper curl
This occurs when an error to the LogHarvest Plus tool occurs. The LogHarvest Plus tool is shown as a house icon on the bottom right side of the UI screen. To resolve this error, select Programs > Startup > LogHarvest Plus.
Software Tool Fault mes- sage: A software tool that is running on the System Computer did respond properly.
Related Topics:
Power on/off the machine
Locating the machine serial number
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-6 User Guide
Problem solving
System menu
Cleaning procedures
Replacing consumable supplies
Jam clearance For any paper jam in the press, especially the fuser area, refer directly to the screen user interface for all messages and instructions on how to locate and remove jammed sheets, as well as for information on sheets purged automatically to the output tray.
Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
Related Topics:
Fault codes
Paper jams in Trays 1 and 2
Paper jams in area 2
Paper jams in areas 3 and 4
Paper jams in area 5
Paper jams in area 6
Paper jams in area 7
Automatic Paper Purge
When a paper jam occurs in the press, the system displays a purge-in-process message. Any unused sheets downstream from where the jam occurred will be automatically purged from the paper path to the closest output tray. Usable sheets will be stacked in the jobs designated output destination. However, any sheets that remain in the area of the press preceding the jam location are not purged automatically. Make sure to manually clear those areas.
Note When the purge is complete, a message displays on the interface screen identifying the output tray locations of the purged sheets and the number of purged sheets. Make sure to remove the number of sheets displayed.
10-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Paper jams in Trays 1 and 2
1. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 2. Remove jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop. 4. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-8 User Guide
Problem solving
Paper jams in area 2
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine left side).
2. Lift lever 2e to remove jammed paper.
3. Rotate knob 2g in the direction of the arrow to remove jammed paper.
10-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
4. Return lever 2e to its original position. 5. Push down on lever 2d and rotate knob 2c in the direction of the arrow to remove
jammed paper.
6. Return lever 2d to its original position. 7. Grasp lever 2b and move it to the right. Rotate knob 2c in the direction of the arrow
to remove jammed paper.
8. Return lever 2b to its original position.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-10 User Guide
Problem solving
9. Push down on lever 2a to remove jammed paper.
10. Return lever 2a to its original position. 11. Close the left and right front doors (print engine left side). 12. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
10-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Paper jams in areas 3 and 4
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine left side).
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-12 User Guide
Problem solving
2. Grasp handle 3 and rotate it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Slowly pull out the paper transport drawer until it stops. 4. Lift lever 3b, move it to the left, and remove the jammed paper.
5. Return lever 3b to its original position. 6. Lift lever 3a, move it to the left, and rotate knob 3c in the direction of the arrow to
remove jammed paper.
10-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
7. Return lever 3a to its original position. 8. Grasp handle 3 and slowly push in the paper transport drawer until it stops. Turn the
handle in the direction of the arrow to lock the module in place. 9. Remove any paper from area 4.
10. Close the left and right front doors (print engine left side). 11. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-14 User Guide
Problem solving
Paper jams in area 5
Warning Be careful when clearing jams in the fuser area, the fuser is extremely hot and will cause injury.
1. Open the left front door (print engine right side).
10-15Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
2. Grasp handle 5 and rotate it in the direction of the arrow, and slowly pull out the fuser until it stops.
3. Carefully remove any jammed paper on the left side of the fuser.
4. Push down on the lever; the fuser exit area opens. Carefully remove any jammed paper on the right side of the fuser.
5. Close the fuser exit area.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-16 User Guide
Problem solving
6. Grasp handle 5 and gently push in the fuser until it stops. 7. Rotate handle 5 in the direction of the arrow to lock the fuser module in place. 8. Close the left front door (print engine right side). 9. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Paper jams in area 6
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine right side).
10-17Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
2. Grasp handle 6 and rotate it in the direction of the arrow, and slowly pull out the exit drawer assembly until it stops.
3. Lift levers 6a and 6b and remove the jammed paper.
4. Return levers 6a and 6b to their originals positions. 5. Grasp lever 6c, move it to the right, and remove the jammed paper.
6. Return lever 6c to its original position.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-18 User Guide
Problem solving
7. Grasp lever 6d, move it to the right, and remove the jammed paper.
8. Return lever 6d to its original position. 9. Grasp handle 6 and gently push in the exit drawer assembly until it stops.
10. Rotate handle 6 in the direction of the arrow to lock the exit drawer assembly in place.
11. Close the left and right front doors (print engine right side). 12. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
10-19Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Paper jams in area 7
Note Area 7 is used for 2-sided (duplexing) only.
1. Open the left and right front doors (print engine right side).
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-20 User Guide
Problem solving
2. Lift lever 7g and move it to right to remove jammed paper.
3. Return lever 7g to its original position. 4. Grasp lever 7f, move it downward, and remove the jammed paper.
5. Return lever 7f to its original position. 6. Grasp lever 7d, move it to the left, and remove the jammed paper.
7. Return lever 7d to its original position.
10-21Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
8. Grasp lever 7e, move it downward, and remove the jammed paper.
9. Return lever 7e to its original position. 10. Lift lever 7c and remove the jammed paper.
11. Return lever 7c to its original position. 12. Lift lever 7b and remove the jammed paper.
13. Return lever 7b to its original position.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-22 User Guide
Problem solving
14. Grasp lever 7a, move it to the left, and remove the jammed paper. 15. Return lever 7a to its original position. 16. Close the left and right front doors (print engine right side). 17. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Fault codes If the printing ended abnormally, or a malfunction occurred in the machine, then a fault code is displayed. If a fault code appears on the machine and it is not listed in the table below, or if a fault persists after following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center. If a fault code is displayed, all print data on the machine as well as print data stored in the machines built-in memory is discarded.
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Open the front doors and verify that the fuser door is closed. Power Off/On the machine.
Fuser Drawer is open.010 300
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Fuser belt speed faults010 310, 010 311, 010 312, 010 313, 010 314, 010 315, 010 316, 010 317, 010 318, 010 319, 010 321, 010 323, 010 324, 010 325, 010 326, 010 327, 010 328, 010 333, 010 334, 010 335, 010 336, 010 337, 010 338, 010 341, 010 342, 010 343, 010 344, 010 347, 010 348, 010 349, 010 350, 010 351, 010 352, 010 353, 010 354, 010 355, 010 356, 010 357, 010 369, 010 370, 010 371, 010 374, 010 379, 010 380, 010 386, 010 387, 010 389
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
A Fuser temperature error or disconnection
010 360, 010 401
10-23Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine.Paper curl (decurler faults)010 362, 010 363, 010 364, 010 365 If error persists, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Power Off/On the machine.The Fuser Belt Out sensor did not change state within one
010 366 If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.second after the Fuser Motor
is energized
Power Off/On the machine.Sensor failure010 367 010 368 If error persists, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Power Off/On the machine.Pressure Roll fan error010 381 010 382 If error persists, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Power Off/On the machine.Fuser Web fault010 400 If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Power Off/On the machine.Fuser Belt fault010 406 If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Power Off/On the machine.Pressure Roll fault010 407 If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Power Off/On the machine.Sheet Life limit occurred010 408 If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-24 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Presser Role Finger fault010 409
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Trim Transfer Belt limit fault010 410
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
V-Tray Belt Exit fault010 411
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Upper Cooling Belt fault010 412
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Roll Assembly fault010 413
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Lower Cooling Belt fault010 416
10-25Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Environmental Temperature Sensor error
010 600 010 601
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Pressure Roll IRS1 and IRS2 Sensing failure
010 602 010 603 010 603 010 604
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Fuser Belt problem010 606
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Fuser Web fault010 910
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Fuser Web is not installed cor- rectly
010 911
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Communication error between the system and the Attention light
024 210, 024 211, 024 700, 024 701
Re-insert the accessory card. Power Off/On the machine.
Accessory card for the Print Server is pulled out, resulting in Print Server not starting
024 910
Cancel job. Power Off/On. Check paper stock in tray
and ensure that stock matches the Tray Proper- ties on the machine UI.
Paper stock mismatch fault with the Print Server
024 911 024 912
Cancel job. Power Off/On the machine.
Operation control cannot be done since Stock file paramet- ers designated for a job differ between when receiving the job and when print the job
024 913
Cancel job. Power Off/On the machine.
Sheet Queue is full024 914
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-26 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Resume the job. Cancel job. Power Off/On the machine.
The STOP button on the PC UI was selected during a job
024 915
Power Off/On the machine.The Delete button on the PC UI or Print Server UI was selec- ted during a job
024 916
Cancel job. Power Off/On the Print Server.
Detected no power to the Print Server
027 321
Cancel job. Power Off/On the Print Server.
Initialize request from the Print Server
027 322
Cancel job. Power Off/On the Print Server. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Print Server video cable fault codes
027 323, 027 324, 027 325, 027 326, 027 327, 027 328, 027 329, 027 330, 027 331
Resume job at Print Server. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Print job is stopped at the Print Server
027 400
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Machine Drum Motor faults042 310, 042 311, 042 312, 042 313, 042 314, 042 315, 042 316, 042 317, 042 318, 042 319, 042 321, 042 322, 042 323, 042 324, 042 325, 042 326, 042 327, 042 328, 042 329, 042 330, 042 331, 042 332, 042 333, 042 334
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Transfer Belt Drive Motor error042 335
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Belt position failure042 336
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Belt Edge Sensor error042 337
10-27Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Broken Fan fault codes042 338, 042 339, 042 340, 042 341, 042 342, 042 343, 042 344, 042 347, 042 348, 042 349, 042 350, 042 351, 042 352, 042 353, 042 354, 042 355, 042 356, 042 357, 042 358, 042 359, 042 360, 042 361, 042 362, 042 363, 042 364, 042 365, 042 366, 042 367, 042 368, 042 369, 042 370, 042 371, 042 372, 042 373, 042 374, 042 375, 042 376, 042 377, 042 378, 042 379, 042 380, 042 381
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Drum Encoder signal errors042 382, 042 383, 042 384, 042 385, 042 386, 042 387,
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Various machine faults042 400, 042 401, 042 402, 042 403, 042 404, 042 405, 042 406, 042 407, 042 408, 042 409, 042 410
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Drum Motor phase faults042 600, 042 601, 042 602, 042 603, 042 604, 042 605, 042 606, 042 607, 042 608, 042 609, 042 610, 042 611
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Registration Belt fault codes042 620, 042 622, 042 623, 042 624, 042 625, 042 626, 042 627, 042 628, 042 629, 042 630, 042 631, 042 632, 042 633, 042 634, 042 635, 042 636
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Software logic fault045 312, 045 313, 045 314
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
RAM Mother board faults045 316, 045 317, 045 319, 045 320, 045 330, 045 331, 045 332, 045 333, 045 334, 045 335, 045 336, 045 337, 045 339, 045 340, 045 341,
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Non-Volatile Memory test fail- ure with the Mother board
045 321, 045 322, 045 324, 045 325
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-28 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Communication failure045 326, 045 327, 045 328, 045 329, 045 342, 045 353, 045 358, 045 359, 045 360, 045 361, 045 362, 045 363, 045 364, 045 365, 045 366, 045 367, 045 368, 045 369, 045 370, 045 371, 045 372, 045 373, 045 374, 045 375, 045 376, 045 377, 045 378, 045 600, 047 310, 047 320,
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Software logic errors045 349 045 350
Power Off/On the machine.Detected a Drive Mother Board faults
045 351 045 352
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Software mismatch045 354, 045 355, 045 356, 045 357
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Burned-out fuse on the Drive Mother Board
045 379, 045 380, 045 381, 045 382, 045 383, 045 384, 045 385
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
NVM data failures045 390, 045 391, 045 392, 045 393, 045 394
Close the front door. Power Off/On the machine.
A front door on the machine is open
048 300
Clear any jams between the GBC AdvancedPunch and the optional finishing device (such as the High Capacity Stacker or Stand- ard/Booklet Maker Finish- er).
Fully open/close the jam clearance lever between the GBC AdvancedPunch and the optional finishing device.
After clearing all jams, a sheet will be ejected from the GBC AdvancedPunch to the optional finishing device; remove the ejected sheet.
This jam occurs when the op- tional GBC AdvancedPunch is attached. The jam may occur between the GBC Advanced- Punch and the optional finish- ing device.
048 324
10-29Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Machine fault codes061 310, 061 311, 061 312, 061 313, 061 314, 061 315, 061 316, 061 317, 061 318, 061 319, 061 320, 061 321, 061 322, 061 323, 061 324, 061 325, 061 326, 061 327, 061 328, 061 329, 061 330, 061 331, 061 332, 061 333, 061 334, 061 335, 061 336, 061 337, 061 338, 061 339, 061 340, 061 341, 061 342, 061 343, 061 344, 061 345, 061 346, 061 347, 061 348, 061 349, 061 350, 061 351, 061 352, 061 353, 061 354, 061 355, 061 356, 061 357, 061 358, 061 359, 061 360, 061 361, 061 362, 061 363, 061 364, 061 365, 061 366, 061 367, 061 368, 061 369, 061 370, 061 371, 061 372, 061 373, 061 374, 061 375
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Read/Write failure061 382, 061 383, 061 384, 061 385, 061 386, 061 387
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Power failure061 388, 061 389, 061 390, 061 391, 061 392, 061 393
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Drum Signal Error061 602, 061 603, 061 604, 061 605, 061 606, 061 607
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Random Optical Scan signal error
061 608, 061 609, 061 610, 061 611, 061 612, 061 613
Remove jammed paper in Tray 1. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Feed Out sensor issue in Tray 1
071 101
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-30 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Check paper loaded in Tray 1 or Tray 2. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2 can be used, depending on which tray (Tray 1 or Tray 2) is effected.
Tray 1 or Tray 2 malfunctioned071 210, 071 211, 071 212, 071 213, 071 214, 071 215, 071 216, 071 217, 071 218, 071 219, 071 221, 071 222, 072 210, 072 211, 072 212, 072 213, 072 214, 072 215, 072 216, 072 217, 072 218, 072 219, 072 221, 072 222,
If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Fault for the Feed/Re- tard/Nudger Roll in Tray 1
071 401
Remove jammed paper in Tray 1. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Paper jam in Tray 1071 901
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly into Tray 1. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Empty or Near Empty paper levels for Tray 1
071 940
Verify the correct paper orient- ation of the print job and the desired paper tray selection. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Incorrect paper position during print job. This may have oc- curred due to paper being loaded incorrectly into Tray 1.
071 941
Verify the correct paper orient- ation of the print job and the desired paper tray selection. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Tray 1 fault when printing from Tray 1.
071 942
Verify that the paper was properly loaded into Tray 1 or Tray 2. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Trays 1 or 2 are offline. This may result in no paper being available in Tray 1 or Tray 2, and switching to another tray was not possible.
071 943 072 943
10-31Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Verify that the paper was properly loaded into Tray 1 or Tray 2. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Print Server set to pull paper from Tray 1 or Tray 2 but that Tray 1 or Tray 2 is not physic- ally set
071 944 071 945 072 944
Remove jammed paper. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Tray 2 sensor fault072 101
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Fault for the Feed/Re- tard/Nudger Roll in Tray 2.
072 901
Ensure that the paper is loaded into Tray 2 properly. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Empty or Near Empty paper levels for Tray 2, and tray was not able to switch to another paper tray.
072 940 072 942
Verify the correct paper orient- ation of the print job and the desired paper tray selection. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Incorrect paper position during print job, paper sheets were loaded in the wrong position.
072 941
Remove jammed paper. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Paper jam in the Duplex sensor073 900 073 901
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-32 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Check for any obstructions in the paper path by removing jammed papers. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Paper jam fault codes077 100, 077 101, 077 102, 077 103, 077 104, 077 105, 077 106, 077 107, 077 108, 077 109, 077 111, 077 112, 077 113, 077 114, 077 115, 077 116, 077 117, 077 118, 077 119, 077 121, 077 122, 077 123, 077 124, 077 125, 077 126, 077 127, 077 128, 077 129, 077 130, 077 131, 077 132, 077 134, 077 135, 077 136, 077 137, 077 138, 077 139, 077 140, 077 900, 077 900, 077 901, 077 902, 077 903, 077 904, 077 905, 077 906, 077 907, 077 908, 077 909, 077 910, 077 911, 077 912, 077 913, 077 914, 077 915, 077 916, 077 917, 077 918, 077 919, 077 920, 077 921, 077 922, 077 923, 077 924, 077 925, 077 926, 077 928, 077 929, 077 930, 077 931, 077 932, 077 933, 077 934, 077 935, 077 937, 077 938, 077 939
Power Off/On the machine.Jam at the Feed Out sensor did not turn on
077 213 077 214
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Transport Chute open in the paper tray area
077 300 077 301 077 302
Close the Doors. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
The Front left and right doors are open on either the print engine left side or print engine right side.
077 303 077 304
Visually inspect the Exit Door. Open, then close the door. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
The Exit Drawer is open077 305
Visually inspect the Paper Path Module. Open and close the Paper Path Module while in- specting for any obvious causes of failure. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Unable to detect the Paper Path Drawer in the print engine left side.
077 306
10-33Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Close the Service Interlock. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Service Interlock is open077 307
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Side Shift Motor error077 310
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Machine mechanical faults077 320, 077 321, 077 322, 077 323, 077 324
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Path Sensor fault077 331, 077 332, 077 333, 077 334, 077 335, 077 336 077 337, 077 338, 077 339, 077 340, 077 341, 077 342, 077 343, 077 344, 077 345, 077 346, 077 347, 077 348, 077 349, 077 350, 077 351, 077 352, 077 353, 077 354, 077 355, 077 355, 077 356
Verify that the Air Assist is ready. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
A Job is started during the Air Assist Warm Up
077 400
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
V-Tra Brush Life limit fault077 401
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Outside temperature exceeded the specified range
077 600
Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Lead Registration out of the desired range
077 601
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Outside humidity exceeded the specified range of the machine
077 602
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-34 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Contact Image Sensor fault077 603, 077 604, 077 605, 077 606, 077 607, 077 608, 077 609, 077 610, 077 611, 077 612, 077 613, 077 614, 077 615, 077 616, 077 617
Remove jammed paper. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Aligner Nip/Release fault077 618, 077 619, 077 620, 077 621
Remove jammed paper. Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Unit Skew Motor error077 622
Remove jammed paper. Cancel job. Power Off/On. Check paper stock in tray
and ensure that stock matches the Tray Proper- ties on the machine UI.
Size of the paper discreptancy077 941 077 942
Power Off/On the machine.Image Registration Control Technology setting value error
089 310, 089 311, 089 312, 089 313, 089 314, 089 315
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Sensor failure or E Patch was not created correctly
089 600, 089 601, 089 602
Power Off/On the machine.Color registration fault codes089 603, 089 604, 089 605, 089 606, 089 607, 089 608, 089 609, 089 610, 089 611, 089 612, 089 613, 089 614, 089 615, 089 616, 089 617, 089 618, 089 619, 089 620, 089 621, 089 622, 089 623, 089 624, 089 625, 089 626, 089 627, 089 628, 089 629, 089 630, 089 631, 089 632, 089 633
Reset the Dry ink/toner waste bottle in the correct position. Power Off/On the machine.
Dry ink/toner waste bottle is not set correctly
089 920 089 921
Empty Dry ink/toner waste bottle. Power Off/On the machine.
Dry ink/toner waste bottle is full
089 922 089 923
10-35Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO).
Important Drum cartridges can be re- placed ONLY by a trained, qualified Technical Key Operat- or (TKO).
If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Communication faults with the Drum Customer Replaceable Unit Memory
089 925, 089 926, 089 927, 089 928, 089 929
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
High Voltage Power Supply Charge Corotron cleaner error
091 310, 091 311, 091 312, 091 313, 091 314, 091 315
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Customer Replaceable Unit Memory communication error
091 316
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO).
Important The charge corotrons can only be replaced by a trained, quali- fied Technical Key Operator (TKO).
If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Charge Corotron Cleaner Mo- tor error
091 317, 091 318, 091 319, 091 320, 091 321, 091 322, 091 323
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO).
Important The charge corotrons can only be replaced by a trained, quali- fied Technical Key Operator (TKO).
If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Charge Corotron fault091 400, 091 401, 091 402, 091 403, 091 404, 091 405, 091 406, 091 407, 091 408, 091 409, 091 410, 091 411 091 412, 091 413, 091 414, 091 415, 091 416, 091 417
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-36 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO).
Important Drum cartridges can be re- placed ONLY by a trained, qualified Technical Key Operat- or (TKO).
If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Drum Cartridge fault091 418, 091 419, 091 420, 091 421, 091 422, 091 423, 091 424, 091 425, 091 426, 091 427, 091 428, 091 429 091 430, 091 431, 091 431 091 433, 091 434, 091 435
Replace Dry ink/toner waste bottle.
Dry ink/toner waste bottle near full
091 436, 091 437
Reset Charge Corotron in the correct position.
Important This can be performed ONLY be a trained, qualified Technic- al Key Operator (TKO).
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Charge Corotron is not set cor- rectly
091 910, 091 911, 091 912, 091 913, 091 914, 091 915
Reset the Drum CRUM in the correct position.
Important This can be performed ONLY be a trained, qualified Technic- al Key Operator (TKO).
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Drum Customer Replicable Unit Memory is not set correctly
091 916, 091 917, 091 918, 091 919, 091 920, 091 921
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Charge Corotron wire error091 922, 091 923, 091 924, 091 925, 091 926, 091 927
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
A Charge Corotron has reached its end of life
091 928, 091 929, 091 930, 091 931, 091 932, 091 933
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Drum Cartridge fault091 934, 091 935, 091 936, 091 937, 091 938, 091 939
10-37Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Drum charge voltage is not meeting the required specifica- tions
092 310, 092 311, 092 312, 092 313, 092 314, 092 315
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Slot Motor failed092 350, 092 351, 092 352, 092 353, 092 354, 092 355
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
There is a problem with the Imaging System.
092 356, 092 357, 092 358, 092 359, 092 360, 092 361
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Mini-Automatic Density Con- trol fault codes
092 606, 092 607, 092 608, 092 609, 092 610, 092 611, 092 612, 092 613, 092 614, 092 615, 092 616, 092 617, 092 618, 092 619, 092 620, 092 621, 092 622, 092 623
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Density patch variances092 624, 092 625, 092 626, 092 627, 092 628, 092 629, 092 630, 092 631, 092 632, 092 633, 092 634, 091 635, 092 636, 092 637, 092 638, 092 639, 092 640, 092 641
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Automatic Density Control Sensor faults.
092 642 092 643 092 644 092 945
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Temperature sensor failure092 646 092 647
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Humidity sensor failure092 648 092 649
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Automatic Dry ink/Toner Con- trol output error
092 650, 092 651, 092 652, 092 653, 092 654, 092 655, 092 656, 092 657, 092 658, 092 659, 092 660, 092 661
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Electro Static Voltage value faults.
092 662, 092 663, 092 664, 092 665, 092 666, 092 667, 092 668, 092 669, 092 670, 092 671, 092 672, 092 673, 092 674, 092 675, 092 676, 092 677, 092 678, 092 679, 092 680, 092 681, 092 682, 092 683, 092 684, 092 685
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-38 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Drum Customer Replaceable Unit Memory errors
092 920, 092 921, 092 922, 092 923, 092 924, 092 925, 092 926, 092 927, 092 928, 092 929, 092 930, 092 931, 092 932, 092 933, 092 934, 092 935, 092 936, 092 937
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
This fault was generated when the software for cleaning the Charge Corotron Cleaner did not function correctly
092 938
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Dispensing errors093 310, 093 911, 093 912, 093 913, 093 914, 093 915, 093 916, 093 917, 093 918, 093 919, 093 920, 093 921
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Customer Replaceable Unit Memory communication fail- ure
093 322
Replace Dry ink/toner Cart- ridge.
Dry ink/toner fault093 400, 093 401, 093 402, 093 403, 093 404, 093 405 093 406, 093 407, 093 408, 093 409, 093 410, 093 411
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Dispenser Replacement timing fault
093 413, 093 414, 093 415, 093 416, 093 417, 093 418
Reinsert Dry ink/toner Cart- ridge. Power Off/On the machine.
Communication failure between the Customer Replace- able Unit Memory and Dry ink/toner Cartridge
093 910, 093 911, 093 912, 093 913, 093 914, 093 915
Reinsert Dry ink/toner Cart- ridge. Power Off/On the machine.
Dry ink/toner cartridge faults093 916, 093 917, 093 918, 093 919, 093 920, 093 921, 093 922, 093 923, 093 924, 093 925, 093 926, 093 927, 093 928, 093 929, 093 930, 093 931, 093 932, 093 933 093 934, 093 935, 093 936, 093 937, 093 938, 093 939
Close the Dispense Door. Power Off/On the machine.
The machine continued print- ing while the toner/dry ink door was open
093 940
Close the Door. Power Off/On the machine.
Unable to detect the Image Belt Transfer Module (IBT)
093 941
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Image Belt Transfer (IBT) error094 310 094 311
10-39Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Second Bias Transfer Belt does not make contact or retract
094 312
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Second Nip Adjustable Motor Cam Home Sensor error
094 313
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Retract Roll error fault094 314, 094 315, 094 316 094 317
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Detected a reversible condition with the Image Belt Transfer
094 414
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Bias Transfer Belt fault094 415, 094 416, 094 417, 094 418, 094 419
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Fault for the Image Belt Transfer (IBT)
094 420 094 421 094 424
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Trim Transfer Module fault094 422
Power Off/On the machine. If the error persists, consult your trained Xerox Productivity Plus (XPP) representative; this person is also known as the Technical Key Operator (TKO). If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Filter fault094 423
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Bias Transfer Roll faults094 600, 094 601, 094 602, 094 603, 094 604, 094 605
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-40 User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Environment Temperature measurement error
094 606
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Environment Humidity meas- urement error
094 607
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Engine Existence Switch Mis- match fault
094 910 094 911
Replace empty Dry ink/toner Cartridge. Power Off/On the machine.
Detected Out of Dry ink/toner
094 930, 094 931, 094 932, 094 933, 094 934, 094 935
Close the Dispense Cover.Toner/dry ink door is open094 936
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Communication problem102 313
Power Off/On the machine.Detected the User Interface power was turned Off
102 316
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Communication failure121 310 121 311
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
EPSV fault121 333, 121 334, 121 335, 121 336
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
RAM failure124 310
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
An error in the Non-Volatile Memory area
124 311
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
System Logic error124 312
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
There is a problem with a USB flash drive that is installed in a USB port on the PC UI.
124 313 124 314
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Inconsistency with the Billing Counter
124 315
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Inconsistency with the Serial Number
124 316
10-41Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Recommended solutionPossible causeFault code
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
The Interface Module soft- ware/hardware is incompatible.
124 318 124 319
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Communication failure between the machine and the Print Server
124 320
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Information inconsistencies with the Customer Replaceable Unit Memory
124 321 124 322 124 323
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Information inconsistencies between the machine Printed Wiring Board and the Custom- er Replaceable Unit Memory
124 324 124 325 124 326
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Problem with a Drum module124 327 124 328 124 329
Power Off/On the machine. If error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Customer Replaceable Unit Memory failure with the Sys- tem Printing Wiring Board
124 330 124 331 124 332
Related Topics:
Jam clearance
Paper jams in Trays 1 and 2
Paper jams in area 2
Paper jams in areas 3 and 4
Paper jams in area 5
Paper jams in area 6
Paper jams in area 7
Image quality This section contains a problem-solving table to help you locate and resolve an image quality problem. Locate the defect in the Problem column and perform the task in the Suggested solutions column. If the problem persists after following all the instructions, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-42 User Guide
Problem solving
Suggested solutionsProblem
This may be caused by too much dry ink/toner being applied to the drum; perform the Dry ink/toner cleaning procedure. Refer to the System Administration Guide for information and instructions on performing this procedure.
White and dark spots or blotches on printed output (especially after printing jobs with low dry ink/toner area coverage)
Before performing any of these steps, always check the status of the CRUs/Supplies by pressing Maintenance button on the PC UI.
If lines or streaks are present, check the Image Belt Transfer (IBT) Cleaner Assembly for wear or damage, and replace as required.
If the defect occurs every 36 mm on the prints, do not replace the drum. This interval is caused by a damaged or defective Developer Housing.
If lines, streaks or deletions in the process direction appear only with Black, then replace the Black Corotron Assembly.
Important The charge corotrons can only be replaced by a trained, quali- fied Technical Key Operator (TKO).
If spots or bands occur every 126 mm on the prints, the Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan Drum is damaged or light-shocked.
Important Drum cartridges can be replaced ONLY by a trained, qualified Technical Key Operator (TKO).
Color lines, Streaks, Spots, Smears, or Bands.
Run jobs with individual colors (yellow, magenta, cyan) in order to determine which color drum may be damaged or light- shocked.
Replace the appropriate color drum cartridge.
Important Drum cartridges can be replaced ONLY by a trained, qualified Technical Key Operator (TKO).
If spots or bands occur every 188 mm, the Black Drum is dam- aged or light-shocked. Replace the Black Drum Cartridge.
Important Drum cartridges can be replaced ONLY by a trained, qualified Technical Key Operator (TKO).
Ensure that the paper tray guides are against the edges of the loaded paper.
Output contains color lines, streaks, spots, stripes (either dotted or continuous), and/or has scratches or un- defined edges.
10-43Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Suggested solutionsProblem
Running all weights at rated speeds may result in a Cross Process Low Gloss Band. On the heavy-weight stocks, this gloss band defect starts approx- imately five inches (127 mm) from the lead edge and is approxim- ately three inches (76 mm) wide. On light-weight stocks, the defect starts approximately six inches (152 mm) from the lead edge and is approximately two inches (50 mm) wide.
Note If this defect occurs, return the Productivity Setting to the Single Paper Weight setting. If the defect still occurs after running another print, call your Xerox service representative for further assistance.
Low gloss bands appear ring on printed output
Before calling the Welcome and Support Center, write down your machines serial number.
Output is completely black or gray over the entire pa- per
Ensure that the paper loaded is within machine specifications. Go to the Paper and Media section for information for information on paper specifications and storage.
White lines, Streaks, Spots, Bands or Deletions
Load a new ream of paper into the selected paper tray.Output contains white stripes either dotted or continuous, has stratches or areas of white where the original was a dark image
Before performing any of the following steps, always check the status of the CRUs/Supplies by pressing the Maintenance button on the PC UI.
Black Lines, Streaks, Spots, Smears or Bands
Ensure that the paper size and type is correctly set for the selected paper tray.
Output has a black border at the edge, only some of the image is visible
If there is a message about low dry ink/toner on the screen, replace the dry ink/toner cartridge.
Output is too light or washed out, solid areas not black or inconsistent shad- ing
Ensure that the paper tray guides are against the edges of the loaded paper.
Image is Skewed or Crooked
Ensure that the paper loaded is within the machine specifica- tions. Go to the Paper information section for information on paper and storage. Refer to the Technical data section for paper specific information.
Load a new ream of paper into the selected paper tray.
Open the front door and check that there are no obstacles in the paper path.
Output is not straight but slanted at an angle
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-44 User Guide
Problem solving
Suggested solutionsProblem
Ensure that the paper loaded is within machine specifications. Go to the Paper information section for information on paper and storage. Refer to the Technical data section for paper specific in- formation.
Unfused Dry ink/toner rubs off
Load a new ream of paper into the selcted paper tray.Ink on the output is not permanent and smears, smudges, and rubs off
Ensure that the paper tray guides are against the edges of the loaded paper.
Misregistration or Image Shift
While in the Administrator mode:
Create a custom stock and add to the Stock Library Make adjustments to the 2nd Bias Transfer setting in Advanced
Stock and run the job again If necessary, continue to adjust the 2nd Bias Transfer setting
until the desired output is achieved If output is still unacceptable, contact the Customer Support
Center
Trail edge of output con- tains dry ink/toner dele- tions, density inconsistency, or is lacking in color depth; this occurs mainly when us- ing heavier or lighter weight stock
Charge corotrons
Important The charge corotrons can only be replaced by a trained, qualified Technical Key Operator (TKO).
When to replace a charge corotron assembly
Unlike other consumable products for the machine, a replace corotron message does not display on the UI. You should replace a corotron unit only when an image quality problem called banding or rainbow banding appears on the prints. The Maintenance tab screen displays a yellow triangle or a red circle when a pre-determined number of prints using a corotron unit have been made. You should ignore these symbols and continue to use the corotron until banding is seen on prints.
Which charge corotron assembly to replace
If you notice streaks or bands of color across prints, a charge corotron unit may need to be replaced. To determine which unit needs replacing, retrieve and print the file named CorotronTest.pdf from the customer documentation CD/DVD. The output print will show banding in the color bar of the corotron that needs to be replaced. Banding of multiple color bars means several corotrons need to be replaced.
10-45Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Problem solving
Banding samples
The following examples of the test print show banding in the color bar of the corotron that needs to be replaced and in the three-color bar. The three-color bar (CMY) is there to help you identify which color is showing banding.
1. Black banding 2. Cyan banding 3. Magenta banding 4. Yellow banding
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses10-46 User Guide
Problem solving
11 Technical data
Machine specifications
Tray capacity
Paper trays 1 and 2 are identical and each tray has a capacity of holding 2,000 sheets. The trays accommodate the following:
Paper weights between 15 lb. Bond to 130 lb. Cover (55 gsm to 350 gsm) Paper sizes starting at 7.2 x 7.2 in. (182 x 182 mm) to a maximum of 13 x 19.2 in.
(330 x 488 mm) If using the optional Postcard bracket, minimum size is 101.64 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6
inches)
Note For more information on the optional Postcard bracket, refer to the Oversized High Capacity (OHCF) section of this guide and the Customer Support Center.
All stock types including transparencies, labels, letterhead, coated and uncoated, drilled, and carbonless
Long Edge Feed (LEF)/portrait or Short Edge Feed (SEF)/landscape loading of paper (dependent on the actual paper size)
The trays also:
Have auto size detection capability; the loaded paper size, weight, type, and orientation is displayed on the UI screen once the tray is closed.
Automatically adjust the tray position in the front and back based on the paper size; this is done once the tray is closed.
Note For tray capacity information on the optional Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF), refer to the appropriate section later in this guide.
11-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Throughput information for all paper trays
Type: Coated or uncoated paper, transparencies, labels, transfer paper, tabbed inserts, drilled (LEF), carbonless paper
Sizes: Minimum = 182 x 182 mm (7.2 x 7.2 inches)
Note If the optional Postcard bracket is used, the minimum size is 101.64 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 inches). For more information on the optional Postcard bracket, refer to the Oversized High Capacity (OHCF) section of this guide.
Maximum = 330.2 x 488 mm (13 x 19.2 inches) Weights: 15 lb. Bond - 130 lb. Cover (55-350 gsm) coated/uncoated
Machine warmup time
The machine warmup times vary depending on the current state/mode of the machine. Machine warmup times are listed as follows:
From a cold start (either power on or power saver mode), less than 5 minutes From Sleep Mode/Power Saver, less than 5 minutes From standby, less than 1 minute When switching print modes (such as from black-only to 4-color), approximately 2
minutes
First print-out time
From standby mode, system usually takes less than 1 minute to the start printing From a cold start (power on or power saver), system takes less than 5 minutes to start
printing
Paper specifications Note Always refer to the Recommended Media List (RML) for a comprehensive list of recommended media. The RML can be access from the Manage Stock Library and can also be downloaded from www.xerox.com.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses11-2 User Guide
Technical data
Coating TypeWeight (gsm)Dimensions (mm) SEF x LEF
Paper SizePaper Type
Uncoated Coated
55 to 80 81 to 105 106 to 135 136 to 150 151 to 186 187 to 220 221 to 256 257 to 300 301 to 350
182.0 x 257.0 210.0 x 297.0 223.0 x 297.0 226.0 x 310.0 257.0 x 64.0 297.0 x 420.0 320.0 x 450.0 310.0 x 432.0 101.6 x 152.4 184.2 x 266.7 203.2 x 254.0 215.0 x 315.0 215.9 x 279.4 215.9 x 330.2 215.9 x 355.6 228.6 x 279.4 279.4 x 381.0 279.4 x 431.8 304.8 x 457.2 320.0 x 488.0 330.2 x 457.2 194.0 x 267.0 195.0 x 270.0 267.0 x 388.0 270.0 x 390.0
B5 SEF/LEF A4 SEF/LEF A4-Cover SEF/LEF DT Special A4 SEF/LEF B4 SEF A3 SEF SRA3 SEF DT Special A3 SEF 4 x 6 in. SEF 7.25 x 10.5 in. SEF/LEF 8 x 10 in. SEF/LEF 8.46 x 12.4 in. SEF 8.5 x 11 in. SEF/LEF 8.5 x 13 in. SEF/LEF 8.5 x 14 in. SEF 9 x 11 in. SEF/LEF 11 x 15 in. SEF 11 x 17 in. SEF 12 x 18 in. SEF 12.6 x 19.2 in. SEF 13 x 18 in. SEF 16-kai (TFX) SEF/LEF 16-kai (GCO) SEF/LEF Pa-kai (TFX) SEF pa-kai (GCO) SEF
Plain paper Embossed Postcard Drilled
------184.2 x 266.710.5 x 7.25 in. LEFExecutive LEF
------203.2 x 254.08 x 10 in.Quatro LEF
------215.9 x 330.28.5 x 13 in.Government-Leg- al SEF/LEF
------226.0 x 310.08.90 12.20 in.DT Special A4 SEF/LEF
------310.0 x 432.012.20 x 17.00 in.DT Special A3 SEF
------320.0 x 450.012.60 x 17.72 in.SRA3 SEF
------215.9 x 279.48.5 x 11 in./A4 LEFTransparency
Gloss Matte
190215.9 x 279.48.5 x 11 in./A4 LEFLabels
Uncoated163215.9 x 279.48.5 x 11 in./A4 LEFTabbed Inserts
11-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Technical data
Environmental specifications The machine enters the Power Saver mode after 15 minutes of inactivity on the machine. The factory default time of 15 minutes can be changed when logged on as the Administrator. For more information, refer to the System Administration Guide.
Ambient temperature and humidity
10 to 32o C, 15 to 85% Relative Humidity (RH) J zone (Dew condensation is inhibited)
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses11-4 User Guide
Technical data
12 Offset Catch Tray (OCT)
The OCT receives the completed print job. Output print sets are offset for easy separation. The maximum capacity of the OCT is 500 sheets of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper.
Enabling the Offset Mode on the EX Print Server Note This information applies only to users who have the EX Print Server connected to the print engine.
When printing jobs, if a message displays indicating that the OCT is not offsetting, check the EX Print Server to ensure that the Offset Mode is enabled. Use the following procedure to enable the Offset Mode: 1. If necessary, cancel the job from printing. 2. Select the desired job. 3. Open the job Properties. 4. Select the Finishing tab. 5. Ensure that Offset Catch Tray is selected for the Output Tray.
12-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
6. Select the Offset Mode (shown with a check mark in the box). 7. Select OK to save and close the Properties window. 8. Resend the print job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses12-2 User Guide
Offset Catch Tray (OCT)
13 Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Overview The optional 2-drawer Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF) provides feeds in a variety of stock sizes, including standard sizes and oversized stock up to 13 x 19.2 in./330.2 x 488 mm paper. Each drawer holds 2000 sheets.
Note The OHCF comes equipped from manufacturing with the Postcard bracket.
13-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Postcard bracket
The Postcard bracket is delivered with the OHCF from manufacturing. The Postcard bracket allows you to print on smaller size media without requiring post-processing cutting or sorting. The Postcard bracket specifically accommodates 4 x 6 in. (101.6 x 152.4 mm) SEF media.
Using the Postcard bracket
Use the following procedure for installing and using the Postcard bracket when printing on smaller media (4 x 6 in./101.6 x 152.4 mm).
1. Slowly open one of the paper trays until it stops and remove the paper.
2. Move the paper guides out to their largest position.
3. Open the front cover of the OHCF.
4. Remove the Postcard bracket from inside the OHCF front cover.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-2 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
5. Install the Postcard bracket so that it sits on the locating pins on the upper frame and in the grooves on the bottom of the tray.
6. Tighten the thumb screw so it locks the Postcard bracket in place.
7. Load the postcard stock and adjust the paper guides against the stock.
8. Close the paper tray and confirm the new settings on the UI. 9. Run your print job.
10. Upon completion of your print job, remove the postcard stock and the Postcard bracket from the tray.
11. Store the Postcard bracket inside the OHCF front cover area.
13-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Loading media in the OHCF
Loading paper in the OHCF
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up. 4. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray. 5. Load paper into the tray. 6. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the
Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
7. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 8. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
9. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
10. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Loading tabs in the OHCF
Note If the optional GBC AdvancedPunch is attached to your machine, refer to the GBC AdvancedPunch customer documentation for instructions on loading tab stock in the trays.
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Fan the tab paper before loading into the tray. 4. Load and align the edge of the tab paper against the right edge of the tray in the
LEF direction as shown in following illustration:
5. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
6. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-4 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop. If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
8. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
9. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Loading transparencies in the OHCF
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Fan the transparencies to stop them from sticking together before loading into the
tray. 4. Load transparencies on top of a small stack of same-size paper and align the edge
of the transparency against the right edge of the as shown in following illustration:
5. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
6. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 7. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
8. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
Loading pre-drilled stock into the OHCF for 1-sided print jobs
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up. 4. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray.
13-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
5. Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for LEF direction:
6. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
7. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 8. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
9. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
10. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Loading pre-drilled stock into the OHCF for 2-sided print jobs
1. Select the appropriate paper stock for your print job. 2. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 3. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up. 4. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray. 5. Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for
LEF direction:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-6 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
6. Load and register the paper against the right side of the tray as depicted below for SEF direction:
7. Adjust the paper guides by pressing in the guide release and carefully moving the Edge Guide until it lightly touches the edge of the material in the tray. Do not load materials above the MAX line located on the rear Edge Guide.
8. If necessary, set the skew adjustment levers to the desired position for your print job. 9. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
10. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option.
11. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Skew adjustment levers The skew adjustment levers are found in all paper trays. These levers are used to improve paper feed accuracy and to reduce paper skew problems.
1. Rear skew adjustment lever
2. Right-side skew adjustment lever
These levers should remain in their default position. The position of these levers should be changed only when there is a skew problem when running a specific print job and/or specific media type.
13-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Changing the skew adjustment levers from their default position may cause more skew problems when running certain media types, such as coated, label, transparency, and film.
Use the following procedure to set the skew adjustment levers. 1. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 2. Slide the rear skew adjustment lever to the right. 3. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop. 4. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size,
type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option. 5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window. 6. Run your print job.
The paper is fed accurately without skew and the printed output is satisfactory; your task is complete.
The paper is skewed and the printed output is unsatisfactory; proceed to the next step.
7. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 8. Return the rear skew adjustment lever to its left, default position. 9. Slide the right-side skew adjustment lever toward the front of the paper tray.
10. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop. 11. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size,
type, weight, and if necessary, paper curl and/or alignment option. 12. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window. 13. Run your print job.
The paper is fed accurately without skew and the printed output is satisfactory; your task is complete.
The paper is skewed and the printed output is unsatisfactory; proceed to the next step.
14. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops. 15. Return the right-side skew adjustment lever toward the rear of the paper tray; this is
its default position. 16. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop. 17. If you are still having skew adjustment problems, refer to the Advanced Stock Setup
information located in the System Administration Guide.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-8 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Tray Properties
From the Tray Properties window the user can view and select a variety of functions on the paper tray. Selections available for the tray vary depending on whether the user is logged in as Operator or Administrator. The following information represents the selections available when logged in as Operator.
Stock Details: This area displays the current tray information including the paper size, type, weight, color, and orientation of the paper (LEF or SEF).
- Comment: This section allows the user to enter information about the paper, such as a brand name or job-specific information. A maximum of 256 characters is allowed.
- Long Edge Feed/Short Edge Feed (LEF/SEF): Indicates the orientation direction that the paper is loaded in the tray: either in the LEF or SEF direction.
Enable Tray: Permits the selected tray to be used. Disable Tray: Prohibits the selected tray to be used.
13-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Override:
- When this selection is cleared, the UI displays a message if the current media loaded in the tray does not match the media information displayed on the Tray Properties window. The user must load the tray with the same media as indicated on the Tray Properties window.
- If selected, the UI never displays a message when there is a media mismatch between the actual tray contents and the information shown on the UI for that tray.
Display Tray Properties automatically when Tray is open: When selected, the Tray Properties window always opens when the tray is open.
Stock Library: This opens the Manage Stock Library window, which contains the names of all the paper stocks that were either created by the user or copied and/or edited from the Recommended Media List (RML). The user selects a desired stock from the list, and that stock is assigned to the tray.
Recommended Media List (RML): Provides a list of all the default, preprogrammed stocks that are available for the machine. The user can select a stock from the RML to assign temporarily to the tray. Once the Tray Properties window is closed, the stock appears name appears in blue/italics indicating that it is a temporary stock. The stock is deleted once a different stock is selected.
Create New Stock: Allows the user to create a new stock that is assigned to the tray. This stock may be saved permanently to the stock library, or it can remain as a temporary stock.
Alignment Profile: Allows the user to select the system default profile or a specific profile that was created and saved from the Administrator mode.
Tray stock mismatch If the paper loaded in a tray does not match the information on the Tray Properties window, the UI may alert you with a Tray Stock Size Mismatch message.
Note This functionality is available only if it is enabled by the Administrator: refer to the System Administration Guide for more information.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-10 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
If you receive this message, do the following: 1. Load the stock indicated on the Tray Stock Size Mismatch window, or 2. Change the Tray Properties to match the contents of the tray.
a) Verify the paper size, type (coated, uncoated), and weight of the paper loaded in the tray.
b) Enter that information on the Tray Properties window.
OHCF problem solving
Clearing OHCF jams
Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
Note Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
13-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Paper jams inside the OHCF trays
1. Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Gently push in the tray until it comes to a stop.
OHCF paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c
1. Open the front cover of the OHCF.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-12 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
2. Move the lever 1a to the right and turn the knob 1c to the right. Remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Return the lever 1a to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the OHCF.
Note If the front cover of the OHCF is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will not operate.
OHCF paper jams at lever 1b and knob 1c
1. Open the front cover of the OHCF.
13-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
2. Move the lever 1b to the right and turn the knob 1c to the right. Remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Return the lever 1b to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the OHCF.
Note If the front cover of the OHCF is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will not operate.
OHCF paper jams at lever 1d and knob 1c
1. Open the front cover of the OHCF.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-14 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
2. Move the lever 1d upward and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. If the paper cannot be removed, turn the knob 1c clockwise, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 1d to the original position.
13-15Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
5. Close the front cover of the OHCF.
Note If the front cover of the OHCF is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will not operate.
OHCF fault codes
024-955
Cause: An OHCF tray is empty or out of paper.
Remedy: Add paper to correct OHCF Tray.
024-956
Cause: An OHCF tray is empty or out of paper.
Remedy: Add paper to correct OHCF Tray.
077-210
Cause: An OHCF tray is broken.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-100
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the paper in the malfunctioning tray. Power Off/On the machine. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-101
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the paper in the malfunctioning tray. Power Off/On the machine. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-16 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-101
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the paper in the malfunctioning tray. Power Off/On the machine. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-210
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the paper setting of the paper trays and power Off/On the machine. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-211
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the paper setting of the paper trays and power Off/On the machine. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-260
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
13-17Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
078-261
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-262
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-263
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-264
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-265
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-18 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-266
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-267
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-268
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-269
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays.
13-19Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-270
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-271
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-272
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-273
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-20 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-274
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-275
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-276
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-277
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
13-21Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
078-278
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-279
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-280
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-300
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-301
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-22 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-500
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-901
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-941
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-942
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays.
13-23Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
078-943
Cause: An OHCF tray has malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Check the paper loaded in the trays. 2. Power Off/On the machine. 3. If problems persist, contact the Customer Support Center.
Note Trays other than the OHCF trays may be used in the interim.
OHCF specifications Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF/Trays A1-1 and A1-2)
SpecificationItem
SEF: 8.5 x 11 in./A4, 8.5 x 13 in., 8.5 x 14 in., 10 x 14 in./B4, 11 x 17 in./A3, 12 x 18 in., 12.6 x17.7 in./SRA3, 13 x 18 in., 13 x 19 in., 12.6 x 19.2 in., B5 LEF: B5, 7.25 x 10.5 in. (executive), A4, 8.5 x 11 in., 8.0 x 10 in. Custom sizes: 182-330 mm (7.2-13 in.) width and 182-488 mm (7.2-19.2 in.) length
Sheet size
18 lb. to 130 lb. cover/55-350 gsmPaper weight
2000 sheets/drawer
Important When using up to Xerox 24 lb./90 gsm paper.
Paper capacity
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses13-24 User Guide
Oversized High Capacity Feeder (OHCF)
14 Interface Module
Overview
The Interface Module is an optional finishing device that is used in conjunction with other optional finishing devices. It is shown here with the optional High Capacity Stacker.
14-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Control panel
The Control Panel consists of the following:
1. Auto Curl button: This button selects the Auto Decurl function.
2. Manual Curl Up button: This button selects the three values of manual up curl.
3. Manual Curl Down button: This button selects the three values of manual down curl.
4. Curl Up/Down indicators: These indicate the amount of manual curl (up or down) that is selected.
5. Auto Curl indicator: This indicates that the Auto Curl Mode is selected.
If you want to quickly and at the point-of-need adjust the paper curl on the printed output, you may use the Manual Curl Up or Down buttons. If the printed output contains too much curl after using these buttons, refer to the System Administration Guide for information on adjusting the paper curl. The paper curl buttons are discussed in more detail later in this section.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses14-2 User Guide
Interface Module
Paper path
As media enters the module, it is fed to the module decurler for paper curl correction. The module decurler has both upper and lower decurler rolls that apply pressure to the media based upon the following:
System default Manual selections made at the module control panel
Based on the paper curl (decurl) settings, the module decurler gate routes the paper to either the up-curl (cupped) path, or the down-curl (bridged) path. The degree of pressure is applied independently to the upward and downward decurler arms.
From the module decurler, the print media is cooled and routed from the module to the optional finishing device(s) that is/are connected to your machine.
Paper curl settings on the module
Preset decurler settings
The module is designed with several automated presettings for controlling paper curl. When using these settings, the amount of curl correction is automatically set by the module decurler. Therefore, if paper curl is a problem, use one of the preset module decurler settings in order to eliminate the problem.
When the media passes through the module decurler, you are notified of the current amount of curl correction through the various LEDs on the module Control Panel. If you require more curl correction, you can manually select curl correction from the module Control Panel.
Manual decurler buttons
The module manual decurler mode has seven levels of curl correction that are available at the module Control Panel: three levels of Up-curl correction and three levels of Down-curl correction, and no correction level.
14-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Interface Module
The amount of curl correction is changed by selecting a related button. The current selected amount of curl correction is displayed by the Control Panel LEDs.
Problem solving
Clearing jams
Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
Note Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jams at lever 1a
1. Open the front cover of the module.
2. Move the lever 1a downward and remove the jammed paper.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses14-4 User Guide
Interface Module
3. Return the lever 1a to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the module.
5. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Paper jams at lever 2a
1. Open the front cover of the module.
14-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Interface Module
2. Move the lever 2a upward, turn the knob 2c counterclockwise, and remove the jammed paper.
3. Return the lever 2a to the original position.
4. Close the front cover of the module.
5. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses14-6 User Guide
Interface Module
Paper jams at lever 2b
1. Open the front cover of the module.
2. Move the lever downward, turn the knob 2c counterclockwise, and remove the jammed paper.
3. Return the lever 2b to the original position.
14-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Interface Module
4. Close the front cover of the module.
5. Follow the instructions on the UI to clear other areas or to resume your print job.
Fault codes
The fault code table lists problems and suggested solutions that apply to the Interface Module/Interface Cooling. If the problem persists after following all instructions, call your Xerox Customer Support Center.
048-100
Cause: Paper jam:
A jam occurred during feeding. A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas. 3. Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-101
Cause: Paper jam:
A jam occurred during feeding. A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas. 3. Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-102
Cause: Paper jam:
A jam occurred during feeding. A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses14-8 User Guide
Interface Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas. 3. Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-103
Cause: Paper jam:
A jam occurred during feeding. A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas. 3. Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-300
Cause: The Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door is open.
Remedy: Close the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door.
048-310
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-311
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-312
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-313
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-314
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
14-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Interface Module
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-315
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-316
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module decurler sensor or belt problem
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-317
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module cooling fan failure
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-318
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module cooling fan failure
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-319
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module cooling fan failure
Remedy: Power off the machine (print engine), then power on. If problem continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
048-320
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connected finishing device or devices.
Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connection finishing device or devices.
Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions. After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area. Power Off/On the machine.
048-321
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses14-10 User Guide
Interface Module
Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connected finishing device or devices.
Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connection finishing device or devices.
Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions. After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area. Power Off/On the machine.
048-322
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connected finishing device or devices.
Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connection finishing device or devices.
Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions. After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area. Power Off/On the machine.
048-324
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connected finishing device or devices.
Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connection finishing device or devices.
Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions. After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area. Power Off/On the machine.
048-325
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connected finishing device or devices.
Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connection finishing device or devices.
Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions. After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area.
14-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Interface Module
Power Off/On the machine.
048-326
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connected finishing device or devices.
Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connection finishing device or devices.
Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions. After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area. Power Off/On the machine.
048-327
Cause: Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module communication failure or connection failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the connection between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connected finishing device or devices.
Fully clear any jams between the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module and the connection finishing device or devices.
Ensure all jam clearance handles/levers are returned to their closed positions. After clearing all jams, remove any ejected paper from the finishing output area. Power Off/On the machine.
048-900
Cause: Paper jam:
A jam occurred during feeding. A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas. 3. Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-901
Cause: Paper jam:
A jam occurred during feeding. A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses14-12 User Guide
Interface Module
1. Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas. 3. Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
048-903
Cause: Paper jam:
A jam occurred during feeding. A jam notification is displayed on the UI.
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module front door. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from the jam clearance areas. 3. Close the front door. Verify the paper used is within the approved paper
specifications.
14-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Interface Module
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses14-14 User Guide
Interface Module
15 High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Overview The High Capacity Stacker (HCS) is an optional finishing device that provides stacking and offsetting capabilities for output to a Stacker Tray.
1. Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module 2. High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Important The HCS requires the Interface Module or the Interface Cooling Module. Module type depends on your product and machine configuration. The module acts as a communication device and paper path between the machine and the HCS.
15-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Tip Your system may accommodate a maximum of two High Capacity Stackers at one time. If your system has two stackers attached, they are referred to as B1 and B2. Also, with two stackers attached, and when one of them is full, automatic switching occurs between the two stackers to ensure maximum productivity for your system.
Note Depending on your product and machine configuration, two tandem High Capacity Stackers may not be supported. For specific information, contact Customer Support.
Identifying the components
The HCS consists of the following components:
1. Control Panel: Provides manual control of the various HCS functions.
2. Top Tray: Holds a maximum of 500 sheets.
Note Labels must be delivered to the Top Tray.
3. Bypass: Used only when a second stacking/finishing device is installed. This path transports media through the HCS to another connected finishing device.
4. Stacker Tray/Cart: Collated sets (up to a total of 5000 sheets) are transported to the Stacker Tray, which is located on a movable Stacker Cart.
Note The Stacker Tray/Cart capacity may be less than 5000 sheets if the media being used is heavyweight or thicker sheets.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-2 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Control panel
The HCS control panel consists of:
1. Top Tray jam: This indicator blinks when there is a jam in the top tray area (E7).
2. Sample indicator: This indicator blinks until a sample print is delivered to the top tray.
3. Sample button: Press this button to have the HCS deliver an additional sample print such that the stack integrity is maintained. A single-page sample is provided to the output area.
4. Unload button: Press once to lower the Stacker Tray and unlock the HCS front door.
5. Unload indicator: This indicator lights when the Stacker Tray has reached the down position and the front door can be opened.
6. Exit jam: This indicator blinks where there is a jam in the exit area (E8).
7. Stacker Transport jam area: These indicators blink when there is a jam in Areas E4, E5, and/or E6.
8. Stacker Entrance jam area: These indicators blink when there is a jam in Areas E1, E2, and/or E3.
HCS top tray
The Top Tray offers the following:
Copies/prints are aligned easily without folds or wrinkles in the output.
To enable easier pick-up of the output, the HCS can be stopped by selecting the Stop button on the machines UI.
15-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Unloading the Stacker Tray 1. Press the Unload button on the HCS control panel.
Wait until the Unload indicator lights and then open the HCS front door. 2. Open the front door after the Unload indicator lights. 3. Position the securing bar on top of the stacked paper. 4. Pull the Stacker Cart straight out of the HCS.
5. Remove the securing bar. 6. Remove the paper from the Stacker Tray. 7. Push the empty Stacker Cart straight into the HCS. 8. Position the securing bar on the fixed area inside the HCS. 9. Close the front door; the tray will rise to the operate position.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-4 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Problem solving
General problems HCS tampers no longer in contact with paper Cause: Problem occurs when printing with Clear dry ink/toner and using media that is 120 gsm, coated, and large stock sizes (such as 12 x 18 in./304.8 x 457.2 mm).
Remedy: Adjust the paper curl before printing the job. Refer to the System Administration Guide for specific information on paper curl settings and adjustment.
Jam clearance Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
Note Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
HCS entrance jams (E1, E2, and E3)
Perform the following steps to clear the jam and resume printing: 1. Open the HCS Front Cover.
15-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
2. Lift the green handle(s) and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the entrance area.
3. Close the green handle(s). 4. Close the HCS Front Cover. 5. If the UI indicates there is a jam in the print engine, follow the instructions on the
screen to remove any paper in the area indicated. 6. Follow the instructions displayed on the UI to resume printing.
HCS transport jams (E4, E5, and E6)
Perform the following steps to clear the jam and resume printing: 1. Open the HCS Front Cover.
2. Lift the green handle(s) and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the entrance area.
3. Close the green handle(s).
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-6 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
4. Close the HCS Front Cover. 5. Press the Unload button on the HCS control panel.
Wait until the Unload indicator lights and then open the HCS front door. 6. Open the front door after the Unload indicator lights. 7. Pull out the stacker cart and gently remove the jammed paper.
8. Push the stacker cart straight into the HCS. 9. Close the front door.
10. If the UI indicates there is a jam in the print engine, follow the instructions on the screen to remove any paper in the area indicated.
11. Follow the instructions displayed on the UI to resume printing.
HCS top tray jam (E7)
Perform the following steps to clear the jam and resume printing: 1. Remove any output delivered to the Top Tray.
15-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
2. Open the HCS Front Cover.
3. Lift the green handle(s) and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the entrance area.
4. Close the green handle(s). 5. Close the HCS Front Cover. 6. If the UI indicates there is a jam in the print engine, follow the instructions on the
screen to remove any paper in the area indicated. 7. Follow the instructions displayed on the UI to resume printing.
HCS exit jam (E8)
Perform the following steps to clear the jam and resume printing: 1. Open the HCS Front Cover.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-8 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
2. Lift the green handle and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the entrance area.
3. Lift the green handle and/or rotate the green knob and remove all paper in the entrance area.
4. Close the green handle(s). 5. Close the HCS Front Cover. 6. If the UI indicates there is a jam in the print engine, follow the instructions on the
screen to remove any paper in the area indicated. 7. Follow the instructions displayed on the UI to resume printing.
Hints and tips for using the HCS
Refer to the following hints and tips when using the HCS:
1. Check the paper in the Stock Tray for curl. a) If no curl is present and if the output is acceptable (meets customer satisfaction),
you are finished. b) If no curl is present and if the output is NOT acceptable, call for service. c) If curl IS present, continue to the next step.
2. Check the paper in the Stock Tray for curl. 3. Adjust the paper curl by using the decurler controls on the top of the Interface
Module/Interface Cooling Module. 4. If the output has not improved, adjust the paper curl again. 5. If the output still has not improved, call the Customer Support Center.
15-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Loss of power
If power is interrupted to the HCS:
Ensure that the power cord is plugged in to the proper wall receptacle.
Ensure that the machine power is switched on.
Ensure that the Ground Fault Indicator is in the On position.
If the power has not been restored by checking the above items, then call for service.
Fault codes 049-100
Cause: There is a top tray sensor fault in the HCS.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-101
Cause: There is a top tray sensor fault in the HCS.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-102
Cause: There is a top tray sensor fault in the HCS.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-104
Cause: HCS bypass exit sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-10 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-105
Cause: HCS bypass exit sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-106
Cause: HCS bypass exit sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-108
Cause: HCS bypass exit sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-113
Cause: Stacker sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-114
Cause: Stacker sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
15-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-115
Cause: Stacker sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-116
Cause: Stacker sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-117
Cause: Bypass path sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-119
Cause: Bypass path sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-121
Cause: Stacker exit sensor jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-210
Cause: HCS front door sensor fault
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-12 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. Close the HCS front door.
049-211
Cause: HCS front door sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. Close the HCS front door.
049-212
Cause: Stacker up/down failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-213
Cause: Stacker up/down failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-214
Cause: Stacker cart sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-215
Cause: Stacker cart sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
15-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-216
Cause: Stacker cart sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-217
Cause: Stacker full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-218
Cause: Stacker full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-219
Cause: HCS front door fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-220
Cause: Stacker upper/lower limit fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-221
Cause: Stacker upper/lower limit fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-14 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-224
Cause: Paper in/out sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-225
Cause: Paper in/out sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-228
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-229
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-232
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-233
Cause: HCS sensor failure
15-15Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-234
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-235
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-236
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-237
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-238
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-16 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-239
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-240
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-241
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-242
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-243
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
15-17Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-248
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-251
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-252
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-253
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-280
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-281
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-18 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-282
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-283
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-284
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-285
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-286
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
15-19Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-287
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-288
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-300
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-310
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-500
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-20 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-700
Cause: HCS communication or software fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check the connection between the Interface Cooling Module and the HCS.
049-900
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-901
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-902
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-903
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
15-21Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-905
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-907
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-908
Cause: The HCS detects paper at the HCS top tray, HCS bypass, or at the HCS stacker tray. However, no paper is present; HCS sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-940
Cause: HCS front door fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-941
Cause: Stacker Cart fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-945
Cause: HCS detects Top Tray as always full
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-22 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas.
049-960
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-964
Cause: HCS sensor failure
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-965
Cause: Stacker height limit or full detection fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-966
Cause: Stacker height limit or full detection fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center.
049-967
Cause: The HCS detects paper still remaining on stacker cart after the front door was opened/closed.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Remove any paper from the stacker cart.
15-23Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Close the HCS front door.
049-968
Cause: Mix size, stacker full detection fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Remove any paper from the stacker cart. Close the HCS front door.
049-969
Cause: Stacker cart elevator motor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Remove any paper from the stacker cart. Close the HCS front door.
049-970
Cause: Stacker limit or full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Remove any paper from the stacker cart. Close the HCS front door.
049-971
Cause: Stacker limit or full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Remove any paper from the stacker cart. Close the HCS front door.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-24 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
049-972
Cause: Stacker limit or full sensor fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Remove any paper from the stacker cart. Close the HCS front door.
049-973
Cause: HCS falsely detects that the Paper Unload button is pressed.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power Off/On the machine
If the problem still exists, contact the Customer Support Center. Open the HCS front door. Remove any paper from the stacker cart. Close the HCS front door.
Specifications Paper guidelines
Stacker Tray will accept 55-350 gsm (either coated or uncoated stock) with the possibility of degraded stock quality and increased jam rate for stocks that are heavier than 300 gsm.
Transparencies may be run to either the Top Tray or the Stack Tray. Stack height should be limited to 100 transparencies.
Coated paper lighter than 100 gsm may not run as reliably as coated paper heavier than 100 gsm.
Non-standard papers longer than 305 mm (12 in.) in the feed direction require 210 mm (8.3 in.) minimum measurement across the feed direction.
Non-standard papers shorter than 254 mm (10 in.) in the cross-feed direction require 330 mm (13 in.) minimum measurement in the feed direction.
15-25Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses15-26 User Guide
High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
16 Perfect Binder
The Perfect Binder is an optional finishing device that takes the printed output and binds it into a finished book; a front and back cover is included with the bound output.
Perfect binding is a process in which the leaves (pages) are bound by using an adhesive and trimming off the excess edges. The adhesive holds the interior sheets of the book together. Front and back covers may be included if desired. The final output is a finished, perfect bound book with a wrap-around cover.
16-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Binder components
External components
1 Compiler tray LED
This LED lights when the compiler tray cover is locked indicating that the binder is in operation. This safety feature prevents access to the internal components.
Note The LED also lights when the printer and Perfect Binder are powering on. Upon completion of the power-on process, the LED switches off.
2 Compiler tray cover
Open this cover to clear jams or to add a book block (printed, finished book) for manual mode operations.
3 Top cover
Open this cover to clear paper jams.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-2 User Guide
Perfect Binder
4 Compiler tray
This tray gathers the finished sheets into a book block, and the book block is used to make the final finished book.
5 Cover inserter
Load paper here for covers or inserts.
6 Adhesive filling tray
Open this tray to insert adhesive pellets for the binding process.
7 and 8 Left and right front doors
Open these doors to clear paper jams or to access internal components.
9 Front doors LED
When a binding operation is in progress the LED changes to orange; this indicates that the front doors are locked. When no binding is in process, the LED is not illuminated, and the front doors may be opened to clear jams and to access the internal components.
Note The LED also lights when the printer and Perfect Binder are powering on. Upon completion of the power-on process, the LED switches off.
10 Trimmer waste tray
Excess paper trimmed from the book block sheets is stored in this tray. The tray is easily removed to recycle the waste trimmings.
11 Book stacker tray
Finished (completed) bound books are transported to this area.
12 Book stacker tray release button and LED
Press this button to open the book stacker tray. A flashing green light indicates that the tray is in the process of being opened or closed. A steady green light indicates that the tray is open, and completed books may be removed.
13 Book stacker tray Full indicator
This LED flashes when a binding operation is in process. A steady green light indicates that the Book stacker tray is full.
14 Entrance transport front door
Open this door to clear jams from the incoming paper path area (E4). Also, the adhesive pellet scoop is stored in this area.
16-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Cover inserter
1 Cover inserter tray
This tray is for loading cover media and inserts that will be bound to the book block during the binding process.
2 Paper width guide
Adjust this guide so that it touches the loaded media in the tray.
3 Inserter cover
Open this cover to access internal components.
4 Inserter inner cover
Open this cover to clear jams.
5 Right inserter baffle
Open this baffle to clear jams.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-4 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Internal components
1 Cover transport
This moves the cover sheets from the cover inserter to the binding area.
2 Bypass transport
This transport moves the cover media to the binding area; the cover media may come either from the cover inserter tray or from the printer (network print job). If book binding is not required, the printed output is transferred from the incoming paper path (from the left of the Perfect Binder) directly through the binder and to the next finishing device in line.
3 Adhesive unit
Applies adhesive to the book block in order to bind the spine of the pages together.
4 Binding area
This area binds the book block to the cover material.
5 Cutter area
This area is where the book block pages are cut/trimmed. Finished books then are transported to the book stacker tray.
16-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Binder control panel
1 Fault indicators/location
These indicators light when a fault or a jam occurs in a particular area of the binder.
2 Adhesive temperature indicator
This indicator displays the status of the adhesive temperature:
Indicator flashing on/of
The binder is warming up; adhesive is warming up.
Indicator is off (no light)
The binder is in power saver mode.
Indicator is on (steady light)
The binder is ready for operation.
3 Start/Adhesive temperature button
Press this button to warm up the adhesive or to start the manual mode process for a job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-6 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Binder circuit breaker
1 Circuit breaker
Located on the rear of the binder. Power to the machine is automatically interrupted when a circuit is overloaded or when a short circuit is detected. The overload causes the power switch to move to the Off position. The overload condition is reset by flipping the switch to the On position.
2 Circuit breaker Test button
This button may be activated with a pencil point to test the circuit breaker.
16-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Book binding path
Bypass path
The bypass path is used when an incoming job does not require the binder. The job enters from the printers paper path, is fed through the binder, and is delivered to the next finishing device in line.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-8 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Standard path
1 Incoming print job
This paper path moves the incoming paper to the compiler tray.
2 Compiler tray
Upon arrival to the compiler tray, the paper is then assembled into a book block.
3 Sub-grip/main grip
The sub-grip and main grip move the book block to the adhesive unit.
4 Bypass transport
If designated, an incoming cover is moved along the bypass transport to the adhesive unit and awaits the book block.
5 Adhesive unit
Adhesive is applied to the spine of the book block.
6 Binding area
The adhesive-coated book block and cover media are bound together and then continue to the next phase of the binding process. If no cover media was specified, the book block continues through the paper path for trimming and delivery to the book stacker tray.
7 Trimming
The three unbound edges of the book are trimmed to size by the cutter unit.
16-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
8 Trimmer waste tray
Once the book edges are trimmed, the paper cuttings are deposited in the trimmer waste tray.
9 Book stacker tray
Finally, the finished books are stacked in the book stacker tray.
Cover inserter path
1 Incoming print job
This paper path moves the incoming paper to the compiler tray.
2 Compiler tray
Upon arrival to the compiler tray, the paper is then assembled into a book block.
3 Sub-grip/main grip
The sub-grip and main grip move the book block to the adhesive unit.
4 Cover inserter
If desired, cover media is loaded into this tray.
5 Bypass transport
The bypass transport moves the cover media to the adhesive unit where it awaits the book block.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-10 User Guide
Perfect Binder
6 Adhesive unit
Adhesive is applied to the spine of the book block.
7 Binding area
The adhesive-coated book block and cover media are bound together and then continue to the next phase of the binding process. If no cover media was specified, the book block continues through the paper path for trimming and delivery to the book stacker tray.
8 Trimming
The bound book edges are trimmed to size by the cutter unit.
9 Trimmer waste tray
Once the book edges are trimmed, the paper cuttings are deposited in the trimmer waste tray.
10 Book stacker tray
Finally, the finished books are stacked in the book stacker tray.
Power on/off Important The binders power is controlled by the system. When the system powers on, the binder also powers on. When the system powers off, the binder does the same.
Power Saver mode
The binders power saver mode is independent from that of the systems power saver. However, if desired, it is possible to set both power saver modes to the same interval. The binders default time is 10 minutes; after 10 minutes of inactivity, the binder enters power saver (and the heater unit for the adhesive switches off). This time may be changed to reflect a value of 1-240 minutes; you must enter the Administrator mode to change it.
If the systems power saver is set to a time interval that is less than the binders, then when the system enters power saver, the binder also enters power saver. By default the system automatically enters power saver after 15 minutes of inactivity.This time may be changed to reflect a value of 1-240 minutes; you must enter the Administrator mode to change it.
Note To keep the binder at maximum running efficiency, it is recommended that the power saver time interval for the binder is kept at the default 10 minutes.
16-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Loading media in the cover inserter tray This tray provides an alternate source for cover stocks. Covers may be printed and supplied by the printer, or they may be manually loaded into this tray. This is especially useful if you have pre-printed covers that you want to use for the book job.
Caution Do not use paper that is torn, crimped, stapled, or taped.
Note
Do not load paper of different sizes. A maximum of 200 sheets of cover stock may be loaded in the tray. Available paper sizes for the cover inserter tray are:
- Paper width (front-to-back): 10.5-13 in. (B4/257-330.2 mm) - Paper length (lead-to-trail edge): 14.33 (B4)-19.187 in. (364-488 mm)
1. Open the ream of paper with the seam side facing up. 2. Fan the sheets before loading them into the tray. 3. Load the paper into the inserter tray and adjust the guide to the width of the paper.
Note Ensure that there are no defects in the paper and that all edges of the paper are aligned prior to inserting the paper into the Inserter.
a) Load the paper with the outside facing upwards and the top towards the rear of the tray.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-12 User Guide
Perfect Binder
b) Align the sheets against the back wall of the tray.
4. From the printers UI, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, and weight from the Tray Properties window.
5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Removing books from the binder 1. The book stacker tray LED lights indicating that a finished book was delivered to book
stacker tray. 2. Press the button to open the book stacker tray. 3. Remove the book and close the tray.
Submitting a job to the binder These exercises require the PDF files for the User Guide and System Administration Guide. If you do not have an electronic copy of these PDFs, download them from www.xerox.com.
The exercises instruct you on how to print one of the customer documentation guides (User Guide or System Administration Guide).
Printing from your computer to the binder
1. From your computer open one of the PDFs files in Adobe Acrobat Reader.
16-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
2. Select File > Print. 3. Select the desired printer. 4. Select the printers Hold queue. 5. Select OK to send the job to the printer.
The job is sent to and remain in the printers Hold queue until released for printing.
6. Go the print server that is connected to the printer. 7. To print the job, go the correct print server procedure in this section and follow the
instructions to setup and release the job for printing to the binder.
Printing from the Xerox FreeFlow Print Server to the Perfect Binder
The following procedures provide instructions on different types of binder print jobs sent from the print server to the binder. Carefully read and perform the steps to successfully print your job.
Binder manual mode with the FreeFlow Print Server
This procedure describes how to use the binders manual mode for both covers and book blocks to create a finished book. Both covers and the book block (book pages) are preprinted prior to using the binders manual mode.
1. Preprint covers and book block (pages) separately and place them within reach of the Perfect Binder.
2. Load the preprinted covers into the binders cover inserter tray. Adjust the paper guides to gently touch the edges of the paper.
3. At the systems UI, confirm/change the tray properties for the preprinted covers. The tray appears on the systems UI as T1.
4. At the print server, select Printer > Finishing . The Finishing window opens and displays the available finishers.
5. From the Internal Finishers area of the window, double-click Perfect Binder. The Perfect Binder Settings window opens.
6. For Manual Mode, select the Enable radio button. This setting takes the binder offline from the press/printer. Any stackers or binders configured inline before the binder are be available to the press/printer, but finishing devices located inline after the binder cannot be used while it is in manual mode.
7. Under Units, select either inches or mm for the measurement unit. 8. For Mode Type, select Bind and Trim for normal binding operation. 9. From the Book Block Stock menu, select the specific stock on which the book blocks
are preprinted. 10. In the Cover area of the window, select the stock on which the covers are pre-printed. 11. For cover Position, accept the default values of 0.00 for Center and Side. 12. For Rotation Adjustment, accept the default values of 0.00 for Top, Front and Bottom. 13. In the Trim area of the window, select Full-Bleed.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-14 User Guide
Perfect Binder
This trims the three sides of the bound book that are not bound. This selection provides the best quality output.
14. From the Standard Size drop down menu, select the size you want for the finished book.
15. For Vertical Position, leave the default value of 0.00. If you want more trimmed from the bottom and less trimmed at the top, decrease the setting. If you want more trimmed from the top and less trimmed at the bottom, increase the setting. The total trim amount remains the same, but the bound book is shifted up or down during the cutting process.
16. Select OK. The Perfect Binder is now ready for manual operation and is offline from the printer for print line jobs. The parameters that you entered have been sent to the binder for the manual operation. Other jobs can be run on the printer, as long as they output to a stacker before the Perfect Binder, and not a finishing device after it in the configuration.
17. At the binder, open the compiler tray cover. 18. Lift Handles 1 and 2 to gain access to the book block area. 19. Insert the book block (printed pages of the book) into the area in the LEF and face
down direction. 20. Move the green lever to adjust the paper guides to the edge of the paper. 21. Close Handles 2 and 1. 22. Close the compiler tray cover. 23. Press the green Start button on the binders control panel.
The book is now bound and/or trimmed.
24. Push the green button to open the book stacker tray and to retrieve the book. 25. Go to the print server. 26. Select Printer > Finishing. 27. Double-click Perfect Binder and click Disable.
The binder is no longer in manual mode.
Printing/binding with preprinted covers to the FreeFlow Print Server
This procedure uses covers that are preprinted on large stock, such 11 x 17 in./A3, and loaded into the binders cover inserter tray. A single file containing the book block is printed and sent to the binder. At the binder the covers are automatically fed and bound to the book block producing a finished book.
1. Load the preprinted covers into the binders cover inserter tray. Adjust the paper guides to gently touch the edges of the paper.
2. At the systems UI, confirm/change the tray properties for the preprinted covers. The tray appears on the systems UI as T1.
3. For the book block pages, load the desired stock into one of the printers trays and confirm on the settings on the systems UI.
16-15Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
4. Send the job containing both your cover and the book block pages to the print servers Hold queue.
5. From the print server, select the job in the Hold queue and then select Job Properties. The Job Properties window opens.
6. Select the Basic tab. 7. For Paper Stock, select the Loaded Stocks button and select the specific stock that
you loaded. 8. For Sides Imaged, select 2 Sided. 9. Select the Stapling/Finishing menu and select Perfect Bind > Portrait Left.
This setting places the spine on the left side of the book as it faces you.
10. Select Finishing Settings. The Perfect Binder Settings window opens.
11. Under Units, select either inches or mm for the measurement unit. 12. From the Type, select Pre-printed Cover. 13. For Stock, select the cover stock that you previously loaded into the binders cover
inserter tray.
Select it from Loaded Stocks since it was previously loaded in the tray.
14. For cover Position, accept the default values of 0.00 for Center and Side. 15. For Rotation Adjustment, accept the default values of 0.00 for Top, Front and Bottom. 16. In the Trim area of the window, select Full-Bleed.
This trims the three sides of the bound book that are not bound. This selection provides the best quality output.
17. From the Standard Size drop down menu, select the size you want for the finished book.
18. For Vertical Position, leave the default value of 0.00. If you want more trimmed from the bottom and less trimmed at the top, decrease the setting. If you want more trimmed from the top and less trimmed at the bottom, increase the setting. The total trim amount remains the same, but the bound book is shifted up or down during the cutting process.
19. Select OK to save and close. 20. Select Print.
The job is sent to the printer and binder.
21. From the binder, the book stacker tray LED lights indicating that a finished book was delivered to book stacker tray.
22. Press the button to open the book stacker tray. 23. Remove the book and close the tray.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-16 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Printing/binding from a single file to the FreeFlow Print Server
This procedure uses a single file that contains a large first sheet to serve as a wrap-around cover. The remainder of the pages in the file are book block size. 1. Open and verify that the first page of your file is correctly laid out for either 1 Sided
or 2 Sided printing. It must be a size larger than the body pages (book block). Once verified, close the file.
2. Load the cover stock into one of the printers trays, and confirm the settings on the UI.
3. For the book block pages, load the desired stock into one of the printers trays and confirm on the settings on the systems UI.
4. Send the job containing both your cover and the book block pages to the print servers Hold queue.
5. From the print server, select the job in the Hold queue and then select Job Properties. The Job Properties window opens.
6. Select the Basic tab. 7. For Paper Stock, select the Loaded Stocks button and select the specific stock that
you loaded. 8. For Sides Imaged, select 2 Sided. 9. Select the Stapling/Finishing menu and select Perfect Bind > Portrait Left.
This setting places the spine on the left side of the book as it faces you.
10. Select Finishing Settings. The Perfect Binder Settings window opens.
11. Under Units, select either inches or mm for the measurement unit. 12. From the Type, select Cover Within Job. 13. For Stock, select the tray where the cover stock is loaded.
Select it from Loaded Stocks since it was previously loaded in the tray.
14. For cover Position, accept the default values of 0.00 for Center and Side. 15. For Rotation Adjustment, accept the default values of 0.00 for Top, Front and Bottom. 16. In the Trim area of the window, select Full-Bleed.
This trims the three sides of the bound book that are not bound. This selection provides the best quality output.
17. From the Standard Size drop down menu, select the size you want for the finished book.
18. For Vertical Position, leave the default value of 0.00. If you want more trimmed from the bottom and less trimmed at the top, decrease the setting. If you want more trimmed from the top and less trimmed at the bottom, increase the setting. The total trim amount remains the same, but the bound book is shifted up or down during the cutting process.
19. Select OK to save and close. 20. Select Print.
16-17Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
The job is sent to the printer and binder.
21. From the binder, the book stacker tray LED lights indicating that a finished book was delivered to book stacker tray.
22. Press the button to open the book stacker tray. 23. Remove the book and close the tray.
Printing from the Xerox CX Print Server, Powered by Creo to the Perfect Binder
The following procedures provide instructions on different types of binder print jobs sent from the print server to the binder. Carefully read and perform the steps to successfully print your job.
Binder manual mode with the CX Print Server
This procedure describes how to use the binders manual mode for both covers and book blocks to create a finished book. Both covers and the book block (book pages) are preprinted prior to using the binders manual mode. 1. Preprint covers and book block (pages) separately and place them within reach of
the Perfect Binder. 2. Load the preprinted covers into the binders cover inserter tray. Adjust the paper
guides to gently touch the edges of the paper. 3. At the systems UI, confirm/change the tray properties for the preprinted covers.
The tray appears on the systems UI as T1.
4. From the print server icon bar, select the Activate Perfect Binder icon. The Printer Status icon on the left of the screen displays Manual_Perfect _Binder.
5. From the Tools drop-down menu, select Manual Perfect Binder tool. The Manual Perfect Binder window opens.
6. For Job Type, select either Binding or Trimming.
The Binding option binds and trims, while the Trimming option only trims. If you select Trimming, a window opens to set the trim amount for the fore edge.
7. Select Save to the Trim Settings window. 8. From Trim method, select None, Fore Edge or Cut to Size. 9. Select Save after setting the Trim settings.
10. Under Body paremeters, select: a) The Paper size of the book block. b) A Paper Type (if different from Plain paper) c) The Coating (Uncoated, Gloss or Matte)
11. Under Cover parameters, select: a) The cover Paper size b) A Paper Type (if different from Plain paper) c) The Coating (Uncoated, Gloss or Matte)
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-18 User Guide
Perfect Binder
12. Select Submit. 13. Select OK to the message that parameters have been sent to the binder. 14. Select Close on the Manual Perfect Binder window. 15. At the binder, open the compiler tray cover. 16. Lift Handles 1 and 2 to gain access to the book block area. 17. Insert the book block (printed pages of the book) into the area in the LEF and face
down direction. 18. Move the green lever to adjust the paper guides to the edge of the paper. 19. Close Handles 2 and 1. 20. Close the compiler tray cover. 21. Press the green Start button on the binders control panel.
The book is now bound and/or trimmed.
22. Push the green button to open the book stacker tray and to retrieve the book. 23. Go to the print server. 24. Select the Perfect Binder icon on the print server icon bar.
The Printer Status now displays Ready, and the binder immediately returns to online with the printer.
Printing/binding from a single file to the CX Print Server
This procedure uses a single file that contains both the cover and the book block. The file is submitted to the print server, set to be finished at the Perfect Binder, and then released for processing and printing. 1. Load the cover stock into one of the printers trays, and confirm the settings on the
UI. 2. For the book block pages, load the desired stock into one of the printers trays and
confirm on the settings on the systems UI. 3. Send the job containing both your cover and the book block pages to the print servers
Hold queue. 4. From the print server, select the job in the Hold queue and then select Job Properties.
The Job Properties window opens.
5. On the Copies and pages screen, enter the number of copies to print and bind. 6. Select Print Method, and select Simplex or Duplex from the menu.
For Duplex, you can select head to head or head to toe layout.
7. Select Paper Stock, and select the parameters for the book body paper. 8. Select Finishing to set parameters for the cover stock.
a) From Output tray, select Perfect Binder Tray. b) From the Pull Cover From, select the source tray for the cover stock. This will be a
specific tray on the press or the binders cover inserter tray.
If you intend to print the cover from the file, you must select a tray on the press.
c) From Cover Content, select the desired option.
16-19Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
d) If there is a spine title or image in the file, select From file for the Spine entry; otherwise, accept the default Blank.
e) From Binding, select the location for the binding: Left, Right, Top, or Bottom.
This is generally Left for most Western countries and sometimes Top for a calendar-like orientation.
f) Select the Trimming job box, to set trim mode. g) For Mode, select either Fore Edge or Cut to Size.
9. Select Save after setting the Trim settings. 10. Review the picture of the selected setup. 11. Verify that this is the desired layout. 12. Select Submit to print the job. 13. From the binder, the book stacker tray LED lights indicating that a finished book was
delivered to book stacker tray. 14. Press the button to open the book stacker tray. 15. Remove the book and close the tray.
Printing/binding from two files to the CX Print Server
This procedure uses one file for covers that are preprinted on large stock and loaded into the binders cover inserter tray. A second file containing the book block is then printed at the printer and sent to the binder where the covers are automatically fed and bound to the book block. 1. Submit the cover file to the Hold queue of the print server. 2. From the print servers Hold queue, open the cover files Job Properties. 3. On the Copies and pages screen, enter the number of copies to print and bind. 4. Select Print Method, and select Simplex or Duplex from the menu.
For Duplex, you can select head to head or head to toe layout.
5. Select Paper Stock, and select the parameters for the book body paper. 6. Select Finishing to set parameters for the cover stock. 7. From Output tray, select any tray or Auto Output Tray. 8. Save and close the Job Properties and release the cover job for printing. 9. Retrieve the printed covers from the output tray.
10. Load the preprinted covers into the binders cover inserter tray. Adjust the paper guides to gently touch the edges of the paper.
11. At the systems UI, confirm/change the tray properties for the preprinted covers. The tray appears on the systems UI as T1.
12. Submit the file containing the book block (pages) to the Hold queue of the print server.
13. For the book block pages, load the desired stock into one of the printers trays and confirm on the settings on the systems UI.
14. From the print server, select the job in the Hold queue and then select Job Properties. The Job Properties window opens.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-20 User Guide
Perfect Binder
15. On the Copies and pages screen, enter the number of copies to print and bind. 16. Select Print Method, and select Simplex or Duplex from the menu.
For Duplex, you can select head to head or head to toe layout.
17. Select Paper Stock, and select the parameters for the book body paper. 18. Select Finishing to set parameters for the cover stock.
a) From Output tray, select Perfect Binder Tray. b) From the Pull Cover From, select the binders cover inserter tray for the cover stock. c) From Cover Content, select the desired option. d) If there is a spine title or image in the file, select From file for the Spine entry;
otherwise, accept the default Blank. e) From Binding, select the location for the binding: Left, Right, Top, or Bottom.
This is generally Left for most Western countries and sometimes Top for a calendar-like orientation.
f) Select the Trimming job box, to set trim mode. g) For Mode, select either Fore Edge or Cut to Size.
19. Select Save after setting the Trim settings. 20. Select Submit to print the job. 21. From the binder, the book stacker tray LED lights indicating that a finished book was
delivered to book stacker tray. 22. Press the button to open the book stacker tray. 23. Remove the book and close the tray.
Printing from the Xerox EX Print Server, Powered by EFI to the Perfect Binder
The following procedures provide instructions on different types of binder print jobs sent from the print server to the binder. Carefully read and perform the steps to successfully print your job.
Binder manual mode with the EX Print Server
This procedure describes how to use the binders manual mode for both covers and book blocks to create a finished book. Both covers and the book block (book pages) are preprinted prior to using the binders manual mode.
1. Preprint covers and book block (pages) separately and place them within reach of the Perfect Binder.
2. Load the preprinted covers into the binders cover inserter tray. Adjust the paper guides to gently touch the edges of the paper.
3. At the systems UI, confirm/change the tray properties for the preprinted covers. The tray appears on the systems UI as T1.
4. At the print server, place the binder in manual mode. 5. At the binder, open the compiler tray cover.
16-21Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
6. Lift Handles 1 and 2 to gain access to the book block area. 7. Insert the book block (printed pages of the book) into the area in the LEF and face
down direction. 8. Move the green lever to adjust the paper guides to the edge of the paper. 9. Close Handles 2 and 1.
10. Close the compiler tray cover. 11. Press the green Start button on the binders control panel.
The book is now bound and/or trimmed.
12. Push the green button to open the book stacker tray and to retrieve the book. 13. Go to the print server. 14. At the print server, disable the binders manual mode and place it back online with
the system.
Printing/binding with preprinted covers to the EX Print Server
This procedure uses covers that are preprinted on large stock, such 11 x 17 in./A3, and loaded into the binders cover inserter tray. A single file containing the book block is printed and sent to the binder. At the binder the covers are automatically fed and bound to the book block producing a finished book.
1. Load the preprinted covers into the binders cover inserter tray. Adjust the paper guides to gently touch the edges of the paper.
2. At the systems UI, confirm/change the tray properties for the preprinted covers. The tray appears on the systems UI as T1.
3. For the book block pages, load the desired stock into one of the printers trays and confirm on the settings on the systems UI.
4. Send the job containing the book block pages to the print servers Hold queue. 5. From the print server, select the job in the Hold queue and then select Job Properties.
The Job Properties window opens.
6. Select Quick Access and set Copies to the number of copies you want to print and bind.
7. If printing on both sides of the book block pages, for Duplex, select Top - Top or Top - Bottom.
8. Select the Layout tab from the menu bar. 9. Select the Booklet radio button.
10. In the Booklet Type area, select 1-up Perfect. A window opens to set Perfect Binder parameters.
11. To the left of 1-up Perfect, select the location of the binding on the book:
Left Binding: this is the default and commonly used for books printed in the west. Top: this provides a calendar-type binding. Right Binding: This is used for books published in Asian or Middle-Eastern
languages.
12. In the Trim area, select the trim amount; options include:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-22 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Use Specified Values: Uses the trim control arrows to manually set trim amounts for the three sides of the book that are not bound.
None: No trimming occurs for the job, just binding. Minimum Trim: the print server automatically applies the minimum trim possible,
which is less than .25 in./6.35 mm. Calculate Trim From Finish Size: This sets the width and height of the finished
size of the bound book, after trimming is complete.
Use the Trim Angles button only when the corners of a bound book are not 90 and therefore the book is not square. If you have already bound some books and know that one of the sides of the bound book is not being trimmed straight, you can adjust the Top, Bottom and Fore edge angle.
13. Select the Body Paper Size for the paper that you loaded in the printer tray for the book block.
14. Select the Cover Paper Size for the paper that you loaded in the printer tray for the covers.
15. In the Cover Content area of the window, for Content input, select Pre-Printed. 16. For Spine Width, use the arrows to set the size of the spine. 17. Under Body Position, for Booklet Scaling, select None or Shrink to Body Size. 18. For Centering Adjustment, select how you want the book images positioned on the
pages: At the center or At the spine. You can use the arrows to fine tune the position if needed.
19. Select Print to print and bind the book.
If you want to check your trim and position settings before printing a large number of copies, select Print > Proof Print.
20. From the binder, the book stacker tray LED lights indicating that a finished book was delivered to book stacker tray.
21. Press the button to open the book stacker tray. 22. Remove the book and close the tray.
Printing/binding from a single file to the EX Print Server
This procedure uses a single file that contains both the cover and the book block. The file is submitted to the print server, set to be finished at the Perfect Binder, and then released for processing and printing. 1. Load the cover stock into one of the printers trays, and confirm the settings on the
UI. 2. For the book block pages, load the desired stock into one of the printers trays and
confirm on the settings on the systems UI. 3. Send the job containing both your cover and the book block pages to the print servers
Hold queue. 4. From the print server, select the job in the Hold queue and then select Job Properties.
The Job Properties window opens.
5. Select Quick Access and set Copies to the number of copies you want to print and bind.
16-23Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
6. If printing on both sides of the book block pages, for Duplex, select Top - Top or Top - Bottom.
7. Select the Layout tab from the menu bar. 8. Select the Booklet radio button. 9. In the Booklet Type area, select 1-up Perfect.
A window opens to set Perfect Binder parameters.
10. To the left of 1-up Perfect, select the location of the binding on the book:
Left Binding: this is the default and commonly used for books printed in the west. Top: this provides a calendar-type binding. Right Binding: This is used for books published in Asian or Middle-Eastern
languages.
11. In the Trim area, select the trim amount; options include:
Use Specified Values: Uses the trim control arrows to manually set trim amounts for the three sides of the book that are not bound.
None: No trimming occurs for the job, just binding. Minimum Trim: the print server automatically applies the minimum trim possible,
which is less than .25 in./6.35 mm. Calculate Trim From Finish Size: This sets the width and height of the finished
size of the bound book, after trimming is complete.
Use the Trim Angles button only when the corners of a bound book are not 90 and therefore the book is not square. If you have already bound some books and know that one of the sides of the bound book is not being trimmed straight, you can adjust the Top, Bottom and Fore edge angle.
12. Select the Body Paper Size for the paper that you loaded in the printer tray for the book block.
13. Select the Cover Paper Size for the paper that you loaded in the printer tray for the covers.
14. In the Cover Content area of the window, for Content input, select one of the following:
Front & Back Separately: Select if the front cover images are on the first page and the back cover images are on the last page of the file. If you select this setting, also set both the Front Cover (Page 1) and Back Cover (Page N) menus to one of the following: Print on Outside, Print on Inside, Print on Both Sides, or Do not Print.
Note When you print on both sides of the front cover, Page 2 is placed on the inside of the cover, and when you print on both sides of the back cover, the next-to-last-page (Page N-1) is placed on the inside.
Front & Back Together: Select if the first page of the file if a large sheet that contains both the front cover and the back cover. The binder wraps this cover sheet around the book block. If you select this setting, also set the Content menu to Print on the outside of the cover (if there are images on just the front of the
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-24 User Guide
Perfect Binder
cover page in the file), or Print on Both sides of the cover (if there are images on the front and back of the cover page in the file).
Pre-Printed: Select if you printed the cover separately and you do not want the print server to create a cover from the file.
15. For Spine Width, use the arrows to set the size of the spine.
For Spine Content, select Document Page if you want to print on the spine and the image is located in the file.
16. Under Body Position, for Booklet Scaling, select None or Shrink to Body Size. 17. For Centering Adjustment, select how you want the book images positioned on the
pages: At the center or At the spine. You can use the arrows to fine tune the position if needed.
18. Select Print to print and bind the book.
If you want to check your trim and position settings before printing a large number of copies, select Print > Proof Print.
19. From the binder, the book stacker tray LED lights indicating that a finished book was delivered to book stacker tray.
20. Press the button to open the book stacker tray. 21. Remove the book and close the tray.
Maintenance While performing maintenance activities, always keep the following items in mind:
It is recommended that you perform all cleaning procedures on a daily basis, preferably at the start of the day before the system is switched on and while the fuser is cool.
If the system is switched on and the fuser is hot, be sure to switch off the system power and allow 30 minutes for the fuser to cool before performing any cleaning procedures.
Only clean the recommended areas of the paper path as described in the cleaning procedures.
Cleaning the binder
1. Switch off the system by pressing the power button (which is located on the Print Engine, Right Side).
2. Disconnect the power cord at the back of the binder. 3. Use a damp, water-moistened (not wet), lint-free cloth to clean the covers and doors. 4. Open each green-handle area and clean the surfaces of these areas. 5. Remove any residual moisture with a dry, lint-free cloth. 6. Return all the green levers to their original positions. 7. Reconnect the power cord to the binder.
16-25Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
8. Power on the system.
Empty the trimmer waste tray
Read the following before performing this procedure:
Do not open the trimmer waste tray while the binder is in operation. Wait until the completion of a job before opening and emptying the tray.
Do not place a plastic bag into the tray. This reduces the capacity of the tray and may cause equipment damage or fault codes to be generated.
When the trimmer waste tray is full, the printer stops running and a message displays stating that the bin is full and will resume after it is emptied.
Tip During larger binding jobs, the trimmer waste tray may require emptying more frequently.
1. Open the trimmer waste tray. 2. Lift and remove the inside tray/bin. 3. Empty the contents of the tray/bin into a waste container. 4. Visually check to ensure that all scraps are removed from the tray area of the machine. 5. Reinstall the tray/bin into the trimmer waste tray. 6. Gently close the trimmer waste drawer.
Adhesive filling tray
Read the following before performing this procedure:
The adhesive supply may be replenished while the binder is in operation. Use only the specified adhesive for use in the binder. Any other adhesive may result
in binder malfunction.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-26 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Store the adhesive in a cool, well-ventilated area and away from high temperature and humidity. The adhesive may combust if placed in an area with open flame or high temperature.
Do not over-fill the adhesive replenishment hopper; otherwise the covers may not close properly and adhesive pellets may get into other areas of the binder causing malfunctions.
Do not use adhesive pellets that have fallen on the floor as they may contain dirt and dust which may cause binder malfunctions.
Do not place anything other than the adhesive pellets into the adhesive replenishment hopper as this may cause a fire in the binder.
The adhesive pellets are transferred to the binder as the supply in the binder is consumed. The binder can contain about 0.8 pounds (380 grams) of adhesive.
Replenishing the adhesive filling tray
1. Open the adhesive filling tray. 2. Open the outer cover. 3. Open the inner cover. 4. Using the supplied scoop, add adhesive pellets to the replenishment hopper until the
height of the pellets is even and level and just below the adhesive limit line. 5. Close the inner and outer covers. 6. Close the adhesive filling tray; an audible click is heard when the tray locks into
position.
Binder problem solving Note
Paper jams are displayed on both the printers UI and the binder control panel.
16-27Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Clear multiple paper jams in the sequence indicated on the printer UI and on the binders control panel.
Paper jams in areas E1 and E2 1. Open the compiler tray cover. 2. Move handle 1b to the left and remove any jammed paper.
3. Move handle 1a to the left, rotate the knob 1c, and remove any jammed paper.
4. Lift handle 2 to the right and remove any jammed paper. 5. Return handles 2, 1a, and 1b their original positions. 6. Close the compiler tray cover. 7. Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-28 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Paper jams in area E3 Note If a jam occurs after the book block leaves the compiler area, the paper is purged with the spine glued to the book block but without a cover attached.
1. Open the inserter cover. 2. Open the inserter inner cover (3a). 3. Open the right guide (3b). 4. Remove any jammed paper. 5. Close the areas 3b, 3a, and the inserter cover. 6. If desired, reload paper into the cover inserter tray. 7. Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
16-29Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Paper jams in area E4
1. Open the entrance transport front door. 2. Open area 4a and remove any jammed paper. 3. Open area 4b and remove any jammed paper. 4. Return handles 4b and 4a to their original positions. 5. Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
Paper jams in areas E5 and E6 Note The binders left and right front doors will not open when the front cover LED is lit.
1. Open the left and right doors.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-30 User Guide
Perfect Binder
2. Lift handle 5a and remove any jammed paper.
3. Return handle 5a to its original position. 4. Lift handle 5b, rotate knob 6d, and remove any jammed paper.
5. Return handle 5b to its original position. 6. Open areas 6a and 6b.
16-31Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
7. Remove any paper jammed paper.
8. Return handles 6a and 6b to their original positions. 9. Open area 6c and remove any jammed paper.
10. Return handle 6c to its original position. 11. Close the binders left and right front doors. 12. Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
General problems
Power interruption during operation Note When power is interrupted to the binder during a print job, the book trimmings may remain in the paper path. Perform the following steps to clear the paper path.
1. Switch off the system by pressing the power button (which is located on the Print Engine, Right Side).
2. Open the book stacker tray. 3. Check for the presence of paper cuttings/trimmings the tray.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-32 User Guide
Perfect Binder
If cuttings/trimmings are present, remove them.
4. Close the book stacker tray. 5. Run a test job to ensure that the binder performs correctly.
Adjusting the printed image and trim
If the printed book is not within the desired parameters, you can adjust the settings from the systems UI.
Important The various image and trim adjustment options may vary from one print server to another. Refer to your print server customer documentation for more information on these options and how to use them.
Fault codes
053-100, 053-101, 053-102, 053-103, 053-104, 053-105, 053-106, 053-107, 053-108, 053-109, 053-110, 053-111, 053-112, 053-113, 053-114, 053-115, 053-116, 053-117, 053-118, 053-119, 053-120, 053-121, 053-122, 053-123, 053-124, 053-125, 053-126, 053-127, 053-128, 053-129, 053-130, 053-131, 053-132, 053-133, 053-134, 053-135, 053-136, 053-137, 053-138, 053-139, 053-140, 053-141, 053-142, 053-143, 053-144, 053-145, 053-146, 053-147, 053-148
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Remove the jammed paper; follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your job.
053-210, 053-211, 053-212, 053-213, 053-214, 053-215, 053-216, 053-217, 053-218, 053-219, 053-220, 053-221, 053-222, 053-223, 053-224, 053-225, 053-226, 053-227, 053-228, 053-229, 053-230, 053-231, 053-232, 053-233, 053-234, 053-235, 053-236, 053-237, 053-238, 053-239, 053-240, 053-241, 053-242, 053-243, 053-244, 053-245, 053-246, 053-247, 053-248, 053-249, 053-250, 053-251, 053-252, 053-253, 053-254, 053-255, 053-256, 053-257, 053-258, 053-259, 053-260, 053-261, 053-262, 053-263, 053-264, 053-265, 053-266, 053-267, 053-268, 053-269, 053-270, 053-271, 053-272, 053-273, 053-274, 053-275, 053-276, 053-277, 053-278, 053-279, 053-280, 053-281, 053-282, 053-283, 053-284, 053-285, 053-286, 053-287, 053-288, 053-289, 053-290, 053-291, 053-292, 053-293, 053-294, 053-295, 053-296, 053-297, 053-298, 053-299
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-301, 053-302, 053-303, 053-304, 053-305
Cause: A cover or door is open
Remedy: Close the opened cover or door; follow the instructions displayed on the systems UI to restart your job.
16-33Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
053-310, 053-311, 053-312, 053-313, 053-314
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-315, 053-316
Cause: Software problem
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-326
Cause: Software problem
Remedy: Recheck the thickness of the incoming job; resend job. If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-327, 053-328
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-332
Cause: Software problem
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-333, 053-334
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-335
Cause: Software problem
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-400
Cause: Book stacker tray is open
Remedy: Close the tray.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-401
Cause: Top cover is open
Remedy: Close the cover.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-34 User Guide
Perfect Binder
053-404
Cause: Adhesive filling tray is open
Remedy: Close the tray.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
053-405
Cause: Trimmer waste tray is full
Remedy: Empty the tray.Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
053-406
Cause: Book stacker tray is full
Remedy: Empty the tray.Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
053-407, 053-408
Cause: Cutter blade is nearing or at end of life
Remedy: Contact your service representative.
053-409
Cause: Adhesive level is low or empty
Remedy: Add more adhesive pellets to the adhesive filling tray.
053-410
Cause: Cutter blade is nearing or at end of life
Remedy: Contact your service representative.
053-411
Cause: Trimmer waste tray is full
Remedy: Empty the tray.
053-412
Cause: Adhesive level is low or empty
Remedy: Add more adhesive pellets to the adhesive filling tray. Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
053-900, 053-901, 052-902, 052-903, 052-904, 052-905, 052-906, 052-907, 052-908, 052-909, 052-910, 052-911, 052-912, 052-913, 052-914, 052-915, 052-916
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Remove the jammed paper; follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your job.
053-922
Cause: Cannot detect the size loaded in the cover inserter tray or the amount loaded in the tray exceeds maximum quantity.
16-35Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Remedy: Remove contents from the tray; reload media into the tray, and ensure that the correct tray programming information is reflected on the systems UI.
054-210, 054-211, 054-212, 054-213, 054-214, 054-215, 054-216, 054-217, 054-218, 054-219, 054-220, 054-221, 054-222, 054-223, 054-224, 054-225, 054-226, 054-227, 054-228, 054-229, 054-230, 054-231, 054-232, 054-233, 054-234, 054-235, 054-236, 054-237, 054-238, 054-239, 054-240, 054-240, 054-241, 054-242, 054-243, 054-244, 054-245, 054-246, 054-247, 054-248, 054-249, 054-250, 054-251, 054-252, 054-253, 054-254, 054-255, 054-256, 054-257, 054-258, 054-259, 054-260, 054-261, 054-262, 054-263, 054-264, 054-265, 054-266, 054-267, 054-268, 054-269, 054-270, 054-271, 054-272, 054-273, 054-274, 054-275, 054-276, 054-277, 054-278, 054-279, 054-280, 054-281, 054-282, 054-283, 054-284, 054-285, 054-286, 054-287, 054-288, 054-289, 054-290, 054-291, 054-292, 054-293, 054-294, 054-295, 054-296, 054-297, 054-298, 054-299
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
055-210, 055-211, 055-212, 055-213, 055-214, 055-215, 055-216, 055-217, 055-218, 055-219, 055-220, 055-221, 055-222, 055-223, 055-224, 055-225, 055-226, 055-227, 055-228, 055-229, 055-230, 055-231, 055-232, 055-233, 055-234, 055-235, 055-236, 055-237, 055-238, 055-239, 055-240, 055-241, 055-242, 055-243, 055-244, 055-245, 055-246, 055-247, 055-248, 055-249, 055-250, 055-251, 055-252, 055-253, 055-254
Cause: Internal component failure
Remedy: Power off/on the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
153-700
Cause: Cutter blade is nearing or at end of life
Remedy: Contact your service representative.
153-701
Cause: Book stacker tray is full
Remedy: Empty the tray.Follow the instructions displayed on the system UI to restart your print job.
153-702
Cause: Book stacker tray is open
Remedy: Close the tray.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
153-703, 153-704
Cause: Defective books which were not trimmed or a book job that was cancelled in the middle of the job, were delivered to the book stacker tray.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-36 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Remedy: Open the book stacker tray and remove the defective books. Dispose of accordingly. Close the tray. If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
153-705
Cause: Trimmer waste tray is open
Remedy: Close the tray.If fault continues, power on/off the system.If fault continues, contact the Customer Support Center.
Paper size and trim recommendations for perfect bound books
Face trim set- ting
Top trim setting
Untrimmed cover size
Untrimmed book block size
Finished size
.50 in..50 in.12 x 18 in.9 x 12 in. (half sheet of 12 x 18 in.)
Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
15 mm11.5 mmSRA3225 x 320 mm (half sheet of SRA3)
A4
.28 in..28 in.12 x 18 in.Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Undersize Letter (8.22 x 10.44 in.)
7 mm7 mmSRA3A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Undersize A4 (203 x 283 mm)
1.25 in..75 in.Custom cut US Standard Fanfold (11 x 14.62 in.)
Executive or Monarch sheet (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
6 x 9 in.
Too small: Finished size is beyond Perfect Binder capabilities5.5 x 8.5 in.
34 mm23.5 mmCustom cut JIS B4 (257 x 364 mm)
JIS B5 (182 x 257 mm)
A5
.281.06Custom cut (minimum size: 10.13 x 16.91 in.)
Custom cut (minimum size: 8.28 x 10.13 in.)
8 x 8 in.
16-37Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Binder specifications
Binding type
Perfect binding is a process in which the leaves (pages) are bound by using an adhesive and trimming off the excess edges. The adhesive holds the interior sheets of the book together. Front and back covers may be included if desired. The final output is a finished, perfect bound book with a wrap-around cover.
Cutting type
Full Bleed, Face cut, and No cut
Cutting distance
Top/bottom: Minimum: 0.55 in./14 mm; maximum: 2.125 in./54 mm
Fore Edge: Minimum: 0.275 in./7 mm; maximum: 1.34 in./34 mm
Book thickness
Minimum: 0.118 in./3 mm
Maximum: 1 in./23 mm
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-38 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Book dimensions
1 Book width
Minimum: 8 in./203 mm
Maximum: 11.7 in./297 mm
2 Book block (body pages)
Minimum: 5.8 in./148 mm
Maximum: 8.5 in./216 mm
3 Cover
Minimum: 11.8 in./299 mm
Maximum: 17.9 in./455 mm
16-39Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Book block (body pages)
Book pages are fed into the binder in the long edge feed (LEF) direction.
Acceptable paper sizes:
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (LEF); 6.93 x 9.84 in./B5 (LEF); SRA4/8.85 x 12.59 in. (LEF)
Acceptable paper weights:
17-43.5 lb. bond (64-163 gsm)
Note Paper stock weights 106-163 gsm are limited to interleaf, a maximum of 10 sheets per book, evenly distributed.
Approximate number of sheets per book (thickness)
10-200 sheets of 17 lb./64 gsm - 20 lb./80 gsm bond paper with a maximum thickness of 1 in./25.4 mm or less for coated stocks
10-150 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm - 28 lb. 105 gsm bond paper; maximum thickness of 1 in./25.4 mm or less for coated stocks
1-10 sheets of 28 lb./106 gsm - 43.5 lb./163 gsm for all stocks
Note The number of pages listed is an approximation. The book block must be between 3 mm and 23 mm (0.118 in. and 1 in.).
Cover
Maximum number of 1 sheet per book and the sheet is fed into the binder in the short edge feed (SEF) direction.
Acceptable paper sizes:
11 x 17 in./A3 (SEF), 9.84 x 13.90 in./B4 (SEF), SRA3/12.59 x 17.71 in. (SEF)
Acceptable paper weights:
24-80 lb. bond (90-300 gsm), 350 gsm Xerox Colotech
Binders bypass mode
Refer to the printers specifications for acceptable paper sizes and weights. These paper types can be transported through the binders bypass mode directly to the next inline finishing device. The printers specifications can be found earlier in this user guide.
Adhesive container capacity
Approximately 0.8 lb./380 grams; contains approximately enough adhesive for 135 books at 100 pages per book for 8.5 x 11 in./A4, 17 lb. (64 gsm) paper.
Cover inserter tray capacity
200 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-40 User Guide
Perfect Binder
Trimmer waste tray capacity
Approximately enough space for paper cuttings from approximately 15 books (when binding 100 sheets of 8.5 x 11 in./A4 paper and trimming them to 6.93 x 9.84 in./B5 size).
Book stacker tray capacity
Approximately 4.17 in./106 mm width capacity
Warm-up time
Approximately 440 seconds (7 minutes) or less
16-41Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Perfect Binder
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses16-42 User Guide
Perfect Binder
17 Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
1. Interface Module: This REQUIRED module acts as a communication device and as a paper path between the machine and the Standard Finisher or Booklet Maker Finisher.
2. Standard or Booklet Maker Finisher: These finishers provide a wide range of finishing and folding options. The Booklet Maker Finisher is shown in the above illustration.
Note The Standard Finisher or Booklet Maker Finisher may be referred to simply as the finisher.
17-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
The Standard/Booklet Maker finisher is comprised of the following components:
FunctionComponentNo.
Contains staples; remove this cartridge to replace staples and clear staple jams.
Staple cartridge1
Container for staple waste; remove this container when full.Staple waste container2
The Top Tray is used for stacked output, and can receive up to 500 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm paper. Copies are delivered here when specific output features are selected, such as Automatic sorting, Collated, Uncollated, or Normal.
Top tray3
The Stacker Tray is used for offset and/or stapled output, and can hold up to 2000 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm paper. This tray also receives copies when you punch and Z-fold copies.
Stacker (middle) tray4
Note Both the Top and Stacker Trays can be used for hole punched output (optional).
This is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. The Booklet tray receives saddle-stitched booklets when you select Single Fold or Single Fold + Stapling.
Booklet output tray5
This is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. When you press this button, the booklet output tray is raised so you can retrieve booklets from the output area.
Booklet output tray button6
Open to clear paper jams, replace staples, clear jammed staples, or remove the scraps from the puncher.
Right cover7
This is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. There are two staple cartridges for the booklet. Remove this cart- ridge to replace staples and clear staple jams.
Staple cartridges for book- let
8
Collects the scraps from the puncher. Open to remove the scraps.
Punch scrap container9
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-2 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
FunctionComponentNo.
The optional Folder tray receives copies when you select C- folding or Z-folding of 8.5 x 11 in./A4 output and 11 x 17 in./A3 media.
C/Z-Fold output tray (op- tional)
10
Open this cover to access the machine and to clear paper jams.
Left cover.11
This tray is called either Tray 8 or Tray T1. Its name depends on which machine to which the finisher is attached. Features for Tray 8/T1 include the following:
This tray is standard on this finisher and is used to load paper that will be used as separators and covers.
Paper loaded here is not printed on; use this tray for pre- printed stock and for insertion into the printed output. (This tray is also known as the Interposer).
Tray 8 holds a maximum of 200 sheets when using 20 lb./75 gsm paper.
Paper can be loaded in the LEF or SEF direction.
Post-process inserter (Tray 8/Tray T1)
12
Press this button to open C/Z-Fold output tray.C/Z-Fold output tray but- ton
13
When you press this button, it activates a decurling feature for the output material. This applies especially to lighter weight paper.
Manual decurl button14
Manual decurling feature on the finisher The finisher provides a manual decurling feature, which allows you to adjust the curl of the print output at point of need.
Pressing the Decurler button on the finisher switches the decurl feature between the Auto, On, and Off modes.
17-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
1. Auto button: When this indicator is lit, the appropriate curl correction is automatically performed depending on the sizes and orientation of the printed output. The button should be set to Auto for most situations. The button automatically switches to the Auto mode when:
The machine is switched on The machine exits the Power Saver mode
2. When this button is pressed and the downward curl indicator is lit, downward curl correction is performed on all printed output. If your output is curled downward, press this button to prevent downward curls.
3. When this button is pressed and the upward curl indicator is lit, upward curl correction is performed on all printed output. If your output is curled upward, press this button to prevent upward curls.
Note When no indicator is lit, the machine does not perform any curl correction to the printed output.
Folding feature If your machine is equipped with the Booklet Maker Finisher and/or the C/Z Folder, you can make prints using the folding option. The option folds your prints in half (single or bi-folding) or in thirds (C-fold or Z-fold types). The folding option is selected from the print driver.
Note In order to use the folding option, the orientation of documents must be short-edge feed (SEF). You must select a paper tray that contains SEF stock.
Fold types Important The Single Fold (Bi-Fold) option is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. The C-Fold and Z-Fold options are available only with the C/Z Folder.
These fold types are available:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-4 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Single Fold (Bi-Fold)
A Bi-Fold has one fold which creates two panels to the output. The Single Fold output is delivered to the Booklet Output Tray.
C-Fold
A C-Fold has two folds which creates a three-panel output. The C-Fold output is delivered to the C/Z Fold output tray.
Z-Fold
A Z-Fold has two folds that are folded in opposite directions, resulting in a type of fan fold. The Z-Fold output is delivered to the C/Z Fold output tray.
Z-Fold Half Sheet (shown here with 3-hole punch)
As with a regular Z-Fold, it has two folds that are folded in the opposite directions. The difference between a regular Z-Fold and a Z-Fold Half Sheet is that the Z-Fold Half Sheet is not folded in two equal folds. The two folds are unequal which allows one edge of the Z-Fold Half Sheet to have a longer edge, and the longer edge allows for stapling or hole punching. The Z-Fold Half-Sheet output is delivered to the C/Z Fold output tray.
17-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Loading paper/tabs in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter) 1. If necessary, remove any remaining media that is currently loaded in Tray 8/T1. 2. Hold the center of the paper guides and slide them to their desired paper size.
3. Load the paper/tabs, aligning it to the front side of the tray.
a) If the paper is preprinted, load the paper with the printed side facing up. b) If the media is tab stock, load the tab side to be fed first (in the direction of the
arrow as shown in the above illustration).
4. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, decurler and/or alignment option If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-6 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Maintenance
Standard/Booklet Maker consumable supplies
Xerox supplies, including staples, staple cartridges, and staple waste containers can be ordered from Xerox by going to www.xerox.com and clicking on either the Contact Us link for specific contact information/telephone numbers in your area or by clicking on the Supplies and entering/selecting your specific machine information (product family and model type).
Note Always refer to www.xerox.com for the latest Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) part numbers.
Store supply items and Xerox parts in their original packages in a convenient location.
Supply Unit Shipped with finisher/Reorder QuantitySupply Item
4 staple cartridges (5000 staples per cartridge) and 1 staple waste container per carton
Staple cartridge/staple waste contain- er
4 pack: 5000 staple refills eachBooklet Maker Finisher staple cartridge
Replace the standard staple cartridge
A message displays on the UI when it is time to replace a staple cartridge. 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
17-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.
4. Hold the positions as indicated by the arrow and remove the staple cartridge from the unit.
5. Push a new staple cartridge into the unit.
6. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-8 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Replace the booklet staple cartridge
In addition to the standard stapler, the Booklet Maker Finisher is equipped with a booklet stapler. When this booklet stapler needs to be replaced, a message appears on the UI. 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. While pressing the lever to the right, pull out the booklet staple cartridge unit.
4. Hold the tabs of the staple cartridge unit by the tabs and lift to remove it.
17-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
5. While holding the tabs of a new staple cartridge, push it into the unit.
6. Push the staple cartridge unit to its original position in the machine.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Replacing the Staple Waste Container on the finisher
The machine displays a message indicating that the Staple Waste Container is full. To replace the container: 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-10 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
3. Locate the Staple Waste Container ( R5) in the finisher, and move the lock lever to the unlock position.
4. Hold R5 as shown in the figure and remove the staple waste container from the machine.
5. Place the used staple waste container into a supplied plastic bag.
Note Do not return a disassembled (used) container to the Customer Support Center.
6. Hold the new staple waste container by the R5 handle area and push it into the machine.
17-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Note To prevent injury, do not put your fingers on top of the container.
7. Push R5 until the lock lever moves to the locked position.
8. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Empty the Punch Waste Container
The UI displays a message indicating when it is time to empty the Punch Waste Container.
Caution Only remove the Punch Waste Container while the system is powered ON. If you switch off the power when emptying the container, the machine cannot detect that the container was emptied.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-12 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
3. Pull the container out of the finisher ( R4).
4. Discard all the punch scraps in an appropriate container.
5. Reinsert the empty container into the machine.
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Finisher problem solving Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
17-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Note Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jams in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter) 1. Press the Cover button.
2. Open cover 1e and then remove the jammed paper and all paper loaded in the tray.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Fan the paper you removed, making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned, and then load them again.
4. Push cover 1e until you hear it click into place.
Note A message is displayed and the machine does not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-14 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the finisher left cover.
3. Move lever 1a downward and turn knob 1c left. Remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return lever 1a to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
17-15Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 1d 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the finisher left cover.
3. Move lever 1d upwards and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move the lever 1d to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-16 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 1b 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the finisher left cover.
3. Move the lever 1b to the right and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move the lever 1b to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
17-17Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 3b and 3d 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the levers 3b and 3d; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the levers 3b and 3d to their original positions.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-18 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 3e and knob 3c 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 3e and turn the knob 3c; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 3e its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
17-19Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 3g and knob 3f 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 3g and turn the knob 3f and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 3g to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-20 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 4b and knob 3a 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 4b and turn the knob 3a; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 4b to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
17-21Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 2a and knob 3a 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 2a and turn the knob 3a; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 2a to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-22 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at lever 2b and knob 2c 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 2b and turn the knob 2c; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 2b to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
17-23Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out the folder output tray ( 2d), swing lever 2e/2f to the right, and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. If you cannot remove the paper, return the lever 2e/2f to its original position. Swing the lever 2e/2f, turn the knob 2c to the right, and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-24 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
5. Return the opened lever ( 2f) or ( 2e) to its original position, and close the output tray ( 2d).
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at 2d and lever 2g 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out the folder output tray ( 2d), swing lever the 2g, and remove the jammed paper.
17-25Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the opened lever ( 2g) to its original position, and close the output tray ( 2d).
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at unit 4 and knob 4a 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out unit 4.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-26 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
4. Turn the knob 4a to remove the jammed paper from the left side of unit 4.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
5. Return unit 4 to its original position.
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at finisher top tray 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Remove jammed paper from the finisher top tray.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
17-27Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
3. Open and close the finisher right cover.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at finisher stacker tray 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Remove jammed paper from the finisher stacker tray.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Open and close the finisher right cover.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-28 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Paper jams at the optional booklet maker tray 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Turn knob 4a and remove any jammed paper from the optional booklet maker tray.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
17-29Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Stapler faults
Follow the procedures provided when the output is not stapled or the staples are bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the following solutions. Stapler faults on output may look similar to the ones shown in the following illustration.
1. No staple
2. Bent staple
3. One side of staple rising up
4. Staple bent in reverse direction
5. Flattened staple
6. Entire staple rising up
7. Staple rising up with the center pressed in
If the output is stapled as shown in the figure above, contact our Customer Support Center.
Note Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled, the stapled nails may be bent. If the bent nails are stuck inside the machine, they may eventually cause paper jams. Remove the bent staple when opening the staple cartridge cover. If you do not remove the bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result. Use the staple cartridge cover only when removing the bent staple.
Staple jams in the standard staple cartridge Note Always check inside the finisher for any individual staples or staple remnants.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-30 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.
4. Check the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples, and if necessary, remove them.
5. Open the staple cartridge unit as shown and remove the jammed staple.
Warning To avoid injury to your fingers, carefully remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
17-31Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
6. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Staple jams in the booklet maker cartridge Note Always check inside the finisher for any individual staples or staple remnants.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. While pressing the lever to the right, pull out the booklet staple cartridge unit.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-32 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
4. Hold the tabs of the staple cartridge unit by the tabs and lift to remove it.
5. Remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
Warning To avoid injury to your fingers, carefully remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
6. While holding the tabs of a new staple cartridge, push it into the unit.
7. Push the staple cartridge unit to its original position in the machine.
17-33Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
8. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Reinserting the standard staple cartridge
Use this procedure if the standard staple cartridge is inserted incorrectly into the machine.
Note Always check inside the finisher for any individual staples or staple remnants.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-34 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
4. If necessary, open the staple cartridge unit as shown and remove the jammed staple.
5. Move the lever on the rear of the staple cartridge unit in the downward direction.
6. While holding the lever down, turn over the unit and remove the staple cartridge from the unit.
7. Detach the outside staples along the line.
17-35Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
8. Push a new staple cartridge into the unit.
9. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
10. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Fault codes
If an error caused the printing to end abnormally, or a malfunction occurred in the Booklet Maker Finisher, then an error code is displayed.
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
If an error code is displayed, all print data of the machine as well as print data stored in the machines built-in memory is discarded.
012-125
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-132
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-36 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-211
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-212
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-213
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-214
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-215
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
17-37Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-216
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-217
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-218
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-219
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-221
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-38 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
012-223
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-225
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-226
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-227
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-228
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-229
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
17-39Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-230
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-235
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-236
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-237
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-238
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-40 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-239
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-240
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-241
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-243
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-246
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
17-41Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
012-247
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-248
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-250
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-251
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-252
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-253
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-42 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-254
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-255
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-260
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-263
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-264
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
17-43Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-265
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-282
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-283
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-291
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
012-296
Cause: The finisher malfunctioned.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center. Check for any obstructions in the paper path and clear them.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-44 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
012-400
Cause: Staple Waste Container near full
Remedy: Follow the procedures to remove and replace the staple waste container in the finisher.
012-949
Cause: Punch Waste Container is not attached
Remedy: Check that the punch waste container is installed in the finisher and inserted correctly.
024-931
Cause: The Staple Waste Container is full or near full
Remedy: Remove the Staple Waste Container and install a new one.
024-932
Cause: The Staple Waste Container is not attached
Remedy: Check that the Staple Waste Container is installed in the finisher and inserted correctly.
024-943
Cause: The booklet staple cartridge is empty or stapling error occurred.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check the staple cartridge and reset correctly. If necessary, replace with a new cartridge. Resume job.
024-957
Cause: Post-Process Inserter Tray (Tray 8/T1) is empty or out of paper
Remedy: Add paper to the paper tray.
024-974
Cause: When feeding paper from the Post-Process Inserter Tray, the designated paper size and the actual size of paper in the tray differ.
Remedy: Reset/change the paper or cancel the job.
024-976
Cause: Finisher staple fault
Remedy: Check staples and reset correctly.
024-977
Cause: Finisher staple feeding is not ready.
Remedy: Check staples and reset correctly.
024-978
Cause: Booklet maker finisher staple operation is not ready.
17-45Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Remedy: Check staples and reset correctly.
024-979
Cause: The staple cartridge is empty
Remedy: Check staples. Follow procedures to remove and replace staple cartridge.
024-980
Cause: The stacker tray is full
Remedy: Remove all paper from the stacker tray.
024-981
Cause: The top tray is full.
Remedy: Remove all paper from the finisher top tray.
024-982
Cause: The finisher stacker tray lower safety warning in on
Remedy: Remove all paper from the stacker tray and remove any other obstructions.
024-983
Cause: The finisher booklet tray is full
Remedy: Remove all paper from the booklet tray.
024-984
Cause: The booklet stapler low staple signal is on
Remedy: Remove all paper from the booklet tray.
024-985
Cause: The booklet stapler low staple signal is on
Remedy: Remove all paper from the booklet tray.
024-987
Cause: The booklet folder tray is full
Remedy: Remove all paper from the tray. Set the output tray for three fold.
024-988
Cause: The booklet folder tray is full
Remedy: Check that the folder tray is correctly attached and set.
024-989
Cause: There is a problem with the booklet maker stapler
Remedy: Check the staple cartridge and reset correctly.
047-320
Cause: A communication error has occurred with the finisher
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-46 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Power off/on the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the error persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
112-700
Cause: The Punch Waste Container is full or near full
Remedy: Remove and empty the waste container, then reinstall it.
116-790
Cause: The settings for stapling are canceled and prints the data
Remedy: Confirm the staple position and try to print again.
124-705
Cause: The settings for punching are canceled
Remedy: Confirm the punching position and try to print again.
124-706
Cause: The settings for folding are canceled
Remedy: Confirm the folding settings and try to print again.
124-709
Cause: The number of pages exceeds the number of pages that can be stapled
Remedy: Decrease the number of pages, or cancel the stapling settings, then try to print again.
Specifications
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
SpecificationItem
Top Tray: Collated/Uncollated
Note Transparencies can be sent to the TOP tray of the finisher ONLY. Transparencies cannot be sent to the stacker (middle) tray.
Stacker (middle) Tray: Collated/Uncollated (Offset available)
Tray Type
17-47Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
SpecificationItem
Top Tray:
Maximum: SRA3, 13 x19 in., 12.6 x19.2 in., 330 x 488 mm (custom size)
Minimum: 100 x 148 mm (SEF), 4 x 6 in. (SEF), A6 (SEF) postcards
Stacker (middle) Tray:
Maximum: 13 x 19 in. (330 x 488 mm), SRA3 Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Optional C/Z Folder tray: Supports A4 (SEF) and 8.5 x 11 in. (SEF) Delivery to a supported third-party, DFA device:
Maximum: 13 x 19 in., SRA3 Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Supported Paper Size
Trays:
Top Tray: 55-350 gsm Stacker (middle) Tray: 55-300 gsm Optional C/Z Folder tray: 64-90 gsm
Delivery to a supported third-party, DFA device: 55-350 gsm
Supported Paper Weight
Top Tray: 500 sheets Optional C/Z Folder tray: Minimum 30 sheets
*When using A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8.5 x 11 in. LEF, 8 x 10 in. LEF, 7.5 x 10.5 in. LEF only. When using paper of other sizes, tray capacity is 1,500 sheets and 100 sets. **Tray may not support some paper types.
Tray Capacity
Maximum staple sheets: 100 sheets
When using paper of size larger than A4 or 8.5 x 11 in., the max- imum number of sheets that can be stapled is 65.
Staple nails may bend when using certain paper types.
Paper size:
Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in. Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Staple position:
1 location: (front: angled stapling, center: parallel stapling, back: parallel stapling*)
2 locations: (parallel stapling) 4 locations: A4 (LEF) and 8.5 x 11 in. (LEF) parallel stapling
*: Angled stapling for A3 and A4
Stapling (variable length)
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-48 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
SpecificationItem
Supported paper size:
Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in. Minimum: B5 LEF (2 holes), A4 LEF (4 holes)
Number of holes: 2, 4, 3 (optional) Paper type: 55-220 gsm
Hole Punching
Maximum number of sheets:
Fold and Staple: 25 sheets Fold only: 5 sheets
When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper, only 14 sheets can be stapled if adding a cover. Paper size:
Maximum: A3, 13 x 18 in. Minimum: A4 SEF, 8.5 x 11 in. SEF
Note When using light-weight stocks, media jams may occur with Booklet Creation, Single Fold, and stapling for output that is 25 sheets or more. If media jams do occur, it is recommended that a different media type is selected for the job.
Paper type: Fold only or Fold and Staple: 55-350gsm uncoated, 106- 300gsm coated Paper Weights/Booklet Capacity:
64-80 gsm, Uncoated: 25 sheets 81-90 gsm, Uncoated: 20 sheets 91-105 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets 106-128 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets 129-150 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets 151-176 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets 177-220 gsm, Uncoated: 5 sheets, Coated: 5 sheets 221-256 gsm, 4 sheets max. coated or uncoated 257-350 gsm, 3 sheets max, coated or uncoated
Booklet Creation/Single Fold
Note Non-stapled fold sets are limited to 5 sheets of paper.
Folding
Paper size:
Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in. Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
The machine does not print on paper loaded in Tray 8/T1. Capacity: 200 sheets when using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper. Paper type: 64-220 gsm
Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter; also called Inter- poser)
17-49Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
Optional C/Z Folder
SpecificationItem
Z-paper size: 11 x 17 in./A3, 10 x 14 in./B4, 8K Capacity:
- Maximum: 80 sheets (A3/11 x 17 in. Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper Z folding)
- 20 sheets for 8K and 10 x 14 in./B4
Paper type: 16-24 lb./64-90 gsm Output tray: Stacker (middle) tray
Z-Fold Half Sheet
Paper size: A4/8.5 x 11 in. Number of sheets to be folded: 1 sheet Capacity: Minimum 30 sheets (When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm
paper.) Paper type: 16-24 lb./64-90 gsm Output tray: C/Z Folder tray
C-Fold Z-Fold
Refer to Booklet Creation/Single Fold specifications for more inform- ation
Single Fold
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses17-50 User Guide
Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher
18 SquareFold Trimmer Module
Overview The SquareFold Trimmer Module is an optional finishing device that is used in conjunction with another optional finishing device that contains a booklet maker.
Note The SquareFold Trimmer Module requires a finisher with a booklet maker attached.
The SquareFold Trimmer Module:
Receives the booklet from the booklet maker area of the finisher Flattens the booklet spine, thereby reducing the booklet thickness and giving it the
appearance of a perfect-bound book Trims/cuts away the face (edge) of the booklet, resulting in a neat finished edge
The booklet is assembled and stapled in the booklet area of the finisher; therefore, the booklet enters the SquareFold Trimmer Module already assembled. Any adjustments to the image of the original and its placement on the booklet page must be done from the machine UI, your print driver, or from the print server.
18-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Note Always refer to the SquareFold Trimmer Module Hints and Tips section before using the SquareFold Trimmer Module. The hints and tips section provides valuable information about setting up your jobs, which in turn ensures the best possible output for your print/copy jobs.
You may want to run one or more test prints/copies before running larger jobs.
Identifying the components
Main components
The main components consist of:
1. Top Left Cover: Open this cover to remove paper jams. The square fold mechanism is found in this area.
2. Top Right Cover: Open this cover to remove paper jams. The trimming mechanism is found in this area.
3. Booklet Output Tray: This tray receives square-fold booklet output from the finisher. 4. Control Panel: The Control Panel consists of a mimic display, buttons, and various
indicator lights. 5. Trimmer Waste Container: Collects scrap/waste from the trimmer. Pull open to
remove and dispose of trimmer waste scraps.
Note The top covers cannot be opened during normal operation or when the machine is idle. The covers can be opened only when an indicator is lit and a jam/fault occurs within the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-2 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Paper path
1. The booklet leaves the booklet area of the finisher and enters the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
2. The Booklet Exit sensor (in the SquareFold Trimmer Module) detects the lead edge (spine) of booklet and moves the booklet to the square fold area.
3. Once the booklet spine reaches the square fold area, the booklet is clamped and the square-folding operation begins.
4. The booklet is flattened and the spine squared according to the square-fold setting indicated on the control panel.
5. After the booklet is flattened and the spine squared, it is moved to the trimmer area.
a. Based on the finished booklet size, the booklet is moved until the trail edge reaches the trimmer cutter.
b. The trail edge is trimmed/cut (based on the finished booklet size entered for the Trimmer Mode Setting).
6. The booklet is then moved to the exit area where it is transported to the Booklet Output Tray.
Note Booklets exiting/leaving the SquareFold Trimmer Module may contain trim remnants/scraps from the previously trimmed booklet. This is due to static electricity build-up and is normal. If booklets contain trim remnants/scraps, simply remove and discard them.
18-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Control panel
The control panel consists of the following:
1. Fault indicators: These indicators light when a fault or jam occurs in a particular area of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
a. This indicator lights when a jam occurs as the booklet is leaving the exit area of the finisher.
b. This indicator lights when a jam occurs in the square fold area. c. This indicator lights when a jam occurs in the trimmer area.
Note If one of these indicators (1a, 1b, 1c) is lit, the top covers can be opened, and the jam/fault cleared; otherwise, during normal operation or when the machine is idle, the top covers cannot be opened.
d. This indicator lights when the Trimmer Waste Container is pulled out or when it is full.
2. Square Fold options: This area of the control panel contains the following:
Note The Square Fold options are available from your computer print driver, from your print server, or from your machine UI (if it is a copier/printer). This is discussed in more detail in the section entitled Square Fold options.
a. Settings button: Press this button to adjust the Square Fold setting; refer to the next item.
b. Square Fold options: Select the desired setting; these settings are discussed in more detail in the section entitled Square Fold options.
Square Fold feature The Square Fold feature can be selected or accessed from your computer print driver, the machine UI, or from the print server.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-4 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Note The Square Fold feature is available only when your machine is connected to both a finisher with a booklet maker and the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
Note The term Book Pressing is used synonymously with the terms Square Fold or Square Folding.
Square fold options
The Square Fold (Book Pressing) feature can be switched on or off based on user preference. When the feature is switched on, you can select one of five options depending on your requirements for the finished booklet job.
Note For the remainder of this section, the SquareFold Trimmer Module Control Panel and the machine UI screens are shown. The individual print server and print driver screens are not shown. The descriptions given for each of the Square Fold options are applicable for network print jobs and apply to any print server/print driver connected to the machine.
1. Square Fold/Book Pressing options on the machine UI; the illustration shown is a representation only. The actual images on the machine UI may vary depending on the machine to which it is connected.
2. SquareFold Trimmer Module control panel 3. +2/Higher/High 2: Use this setting when you want the most amount of pressure
applied to the spine of the booklet. The more pressure applied to the booklet, the more square the booklet spine will be. The greatest amount of pressure that can be applied to the booklet is +2.
Additionally, you may want to select this setting when your finished booklet is five pages or less and on heavier weight paper (200 gsm or greater).
4. +1/High/High 1: Use this setting when you want a greater amount of pressure applied to the spine of the booklet, but not as much pressure as the +2 setting uses.
5. Auto/Normal: This is the machine default setting and is used for most jobs.
18-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
6. -1/Low/Low 1: Use this setting when you want less pressure applied to the spine of the booklet. The less pressure applied to the booklet, the more rounded the booklet spine will be.
7. -2/Lower/Low 2: Select this setting when your finished booklet is five pages or less and on lighter weight paper (100 gsm or lower). The least amount of pressure that can be applied to the booklet is -2.
Choose the setting that best fits your needs for the booklet output.
Note You may want to run one or more test prints before running larger jobs.
The following illustration shows two different booklets: one booklet which was square-folded and one booklet that was not square-folded.
1. This booklet was not square-folded. It has a more rounded, thicker appearance to the spine of the booklet.
2. This booklet was square-folded. The booklet spine is flattened and squared, giving it the appearance of a perfect-bound book.
Accessing the Square Fold options
For network print jobs, the Square Fold feature and its related options can be accessed either from your computers print driver (before the job is submitted for printing or at the print server (after the job is submitted for printing). To access the Square Fold feature/options for network print jobs, perform the following: 1. For jobs being sent from your computer, continue to the next step.
For jobs already at the print server, continue to Step 3.
2. From your computer, open the desired job in its appropriate application (for example, Microsoft Word or Adobe Reader). a) Select File and Print. b) From the Print window, select the desired machine (with the SquareFold Trimmer
Module attached to it), and then select Properties for that machine. c) Continue to Step 4.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-6 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
3. From the print server, if applicable, open the Properties of the desired job: a) Double click on the job (from either the Hold or Printed Jobs queues). b) From the Properties window, go to the Finishing/Output tab. c) Continue to the next step.
4. Ensure that the correct output tray is selected (Booklet Maker Tray). 5. If necessary, ensure that the correct Stapling/Finishing/Folding features are selected. 6. Select the desired Square Fold (Book Pressing) option. 7. Select OK to save selections and close any Properties windows. 8. Send the job to the machine.
Trimmer feature The Trimmer feature can be selected/accessed from your computer print driver, the machine UI, or from the print server.
Note The Trimmer feature is available only when your machine is connected to both a finisher with a booklet maker and the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
Trimmer options
When using the Trimmer options, always consider the following:
Booklets exiting/leaving the SquareFold Trimmer Module may contain trim remnants/scraps from the previously trimmed booklet. This is due to static electricity build-up and is normal. If booklets contain trim remnants/scraps, simply remove and discard them.
The Trimmer feature can be switched on or off based on user preference. When the feature is switched on, you can adjust the trim setting in 0.1 mm/0.0039 in. increments depending on your requirements for the finished booklet job.
Note For the remainder of this section, the machine UI screen is shown. The individual print server and print driver screens are not shown. The descriptions given for each of the Trimmer options are applicable for network print jobs, and apply to any print server/print driver connected to the machine.
18-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
1. Select the arrow buttons to decrease or increase the trimmer setting. Adjustments are made in 0.1 mm/0.0039 in. increments.
2. The trimmer setting is based on:
The number of sheets in the finished booklet The finished booklet width size (such as 8.5 in./210 mm or 5.5 in./149 mm) The media type (for example coated/uncoated, glossy) The media weight
Note Important! You may have to experiment with various settings in order to determine the best settings for your particular job. Also, you may want to run one or more test prints before running larger jobs in order to ensure the best possible booklet output.
Note Trim settings cannot be adjusted to remove less than 2 mm (0.078 in.) or more than 20 mm (0.787 in.) of edge material from the booklet. Adjustments less than 2 mm (0.078 in.) may produce poor trim quality, and adjustments greater 20 mm (0.078 in.) result in no trimming to the booklet edge.
Choose the setting that best fits your needs for the booklet output.
Trim guidelines
The following table shows various scenarios using different paper weights, media types, and trim setting selections. Use this table as a guideline when selecting a trim setting for your specific job.
Note The settings shown in the following table are provided as examples and are not meant to represent every possible job scenario; again, use this table as a guideline only.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-8 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Number of pages in finished booklet
Approximate trim setting (mm)
Paper weight (lbs./gsm)
Finished booklet sizePaper SizeScenario
number
2013020 lbs./75 gsm
5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 210 mm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 298 mm)1
1412524 lbs./90 gsm
5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 210 mm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 298 mm)2
1013532 lbs./120 gsm
5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 210 mm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 298 mm)3
1012520 lbs./75 gsm
5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 210 mm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 298 mm)4
1213580 lbs./120 gsm
5.5 x 8.5 in./149 x 210 mm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 (210 x 298 mm)
5
617220 lbs./75 gsm
8.5 x 7 in./250 x 176.5 mm
8.5 x 14 in./B4 (250 x 353 mm)
6
617024 lbs./90 gsm
8.5 x 7 in./250 x 176.5 mm
8.5 x 14 in./B4 (250 x 353 mm)
7
1420024 lbs./90 gsm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 210 x 297 mm)
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 x420 mm)
8
520580 lbs./216 gsm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 210 x 297 mm)
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 x420 mm)
9
2221020 lbs./80 gsm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 210 x 297 mm)
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 x420 mm)
10
821024 lbs./90 gsm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 210 x 297 mm)
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 x420 mm)
11
1020580 lbs./120 gsm
8.5 x 11 in./A4 210 x 297 mm)
11 x 17 in./A3 (297 x420 mm)
12
622080 lbs./120 gsm
6 x 9 in./152 x 229 mm
12 x 18 in./305 x 458 mm
13
521580 lbs./120 gsm
6 x 9 in./152 x 229 mm
12 x 18 in./305 x 458 mm
14
421080 lbs./120 gsm
6 x 9 in./152 x 229 mm
12 x 18 in./305 x 458 mm
15
1622028 lbs./105 gsm
6 x 9 in./152 x 229 mm
12 x 18 in./305 x 458 mm
16
1421080 lbs./120 gsm
6 x 9 in./152 x 229 mm
12 x 18 in./305 x 458 mm
17
18-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Accessing the Trimmer options
For network print jobs, the Trimmer feature and its related options can be accessed either from your computers print driver (before the job is submitted for printing or at the print server (after the job is submitted for printing). To access the Trimmer feature/options for network print jobs, perform the following: 1. For jobs being sent from your computer, continue to the next step.
For jobs already at the print server, continue to Step 3.
2. From your computer, open the desired job in its appropriate application (for example, Microsoft Word or Adobe Reader). a) Select File and Print. b) From the Print window, select the desired machine (with the SquareFold Trimmer
Module attached to it), and then select Properties for that machine. c) Continue to Step 4.
3. From the print server, if applicable, open the Properties of the desired job: a) Double click on the job (from either the Hold or Printed Jobs queues). b) From the Properties window, go to the Finishing/Output tab. c) Continue to the next step.
4. Ensure that the correct output tray is selected (Booklet Maker Tray). 5. If necessary, ensure that the correct Stapling/Finishing/Folding features are selected. 6. Select the desired Trimmer option. 7. Select OK to save selections and close any Properties windows. 8. Send the job to the machine.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-10 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Hints and tips
Printing full-page images on booklets
When using full-page images, ensure that the finished booklet size accommodates any full-page images, and that when the booklet is trimmed, these images are not truncated. Refer to the illustration.
1. This booklet has preprinted front and back covers with a full-page image. It was printed on 8.5 x 14 in./B4 paper. The front cover, which was trimmed, displays the entire image.
2. This same booklet was printed on 8.5 x 11 in./A4 paper. The image on the front cover is truncated after trimming it.
Before you print any booklet job, you should consider your whole job, including the following:
What is the desired size of the finished booklet? Does the booklet contain full-page images? Are you using preprinted covers with full-page images? Are you trimming the booklet? Do you need to shift any full-page images in order to ensure they fit on the finished
booklet?
These are important questions which can affect the output of your booklet jobs, especially if you are using full-page images and trimming the booklet edges.
Follow these tips
Follow these tips to ensure you get your desired output:
Always run one or more test prints of your job before running a larger output quantity.
18-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Review your test prints for truncated images/text. If any images or text need shifting, use the various selections from your applications
print driver; refer to your print drivers Help information. Remember: it may take one or more test prints before you achieve your desired
output.
Problem solving
Jam clearance Note The top covers cannot be opened during normal operation or when the machine is idle. The covers can be opened only when an indicator is lit and a jam/fault occurs within the SquareFold Trimmer Module. For indicator details, refer to the control panel information earlier in this section.
The paper path is shown in the above illustration. Clear any paper jams that may occur along the paper path. If a jam occurs, the machine stops printing, and a message may be displayed on the User Interface (UI).
Note To determine if the jam/fault is within the finisher or with the SquareFold Trimmer Module, always begin your troubleshooting with the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
Clearing jams
Use the following procedure to clear jams or faults and then resume printing: 1. Follow the instructions displayed on the machine's UI. 2. If instructed by the machine UI, open the Top Left Cover and the Top Right Cover
of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 3. Look for any jammed booklets within the SquareFold Trimmer Module paper path
and remove them.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-12 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
4. Check for loose trim scraps along the paper path and remove them. 5. Close the Top Left and Right Covers. 6. Empty the Trimmer Waste Container. 7. Ensure that the Trimmer Waste Container is completely pushed in/closed. 8. Ensure that all covers on the SquareFold Trimmer Module are closed. 9. If the SquareFold Trimmer Module Control Panel and/or the machines UI indicate
there is a still a jam, recheck the SquareFold Trimmer Module (steps 1-8). 10. If necessary, open the finisher to look for jams/faults along the finisher path. 11. Follow the instructions displayed on the machine UI to resume printing.
Clearing E1/E2 jams
Use the following procedure to clear jams when the E1 and/or E2 LED is lit on the SquareFold Trimmer Module control panel. 1. Make sure that the machine is not in operation, and press the button on the left cover
of the Trimmer unit to open the cover.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
18-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
3. If you cannot remove the paper in Step 2, open the right cover of the finisher.
4. Turn the knob 4a to the right, and then remove the jammed paper.
5. Close the left cover of the Trimmer unit.
6. If you opened the right cover of the finisher in Step 3, close the cover.
Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the right cover of the finisher is even slightly open.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-14 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Clearing E3 jams
Use the following procedure to clear jams when the E3 LED is lit on the SquareFold Trimmer Module control panel. 1. Make sure that the machine is not in operation, and press the button on the right
cover of the Trimmer unit to open the cover.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
3. Close the right cover of the Trimmer unit.
Fault codes
If a jam/fault occurs in the SquareFold Trimmer Module, the machines UI displays a jam/fault message. The following table provides a list of fault codes for the SquareFold Trimmer Module and a list of related finisher fault codes.
18-15Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Note The top covers cannot be opened during normal operation or when the machine is idle. The covers can be opened only when an indicator is lit and a jam/fault occurs within the SquareFold Trimmer Module. For indicator details, refer to the control panel information earlier in this section.
012-115
Cause: Finisher jam or fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. If machine UI continues to reflect a fault/jam, go to the finisher:
Open the finisher. Remove any jams Close the finisher cover(s).
2. Follow the instructions shown on the machine UI to resume printing.
3. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 4. If fault persists, call for service.
012-264
Cause: Finisher jam or fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. If machine UI continues to reflect a fault/jam, go to the finisher:
Open the finisher. Remove any jams Close the finisher cover(s).
2. Follow the instructions shown on the machine UI to resume printing.
3. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 4. If fault persists, call for service.
012-302
Cause: Finisher jam or fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. If machine UI continues to reflect a fault/jam, go to the finisher:
Open the finisher. Remove any jams Close the finisher cover(s).
2. Follow the instructions shown on the machine UI to resume printing.
3. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 4. If fault persists, call for service.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-16 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
013-100
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-101
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-102
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-103
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
18-17Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-104
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-105
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-106
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-18 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-208
Cause: The Trimmer Waste Container is full or has a fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Pull open the container and empty any trimmer scraps from it. 2. Reinsert the container into the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 3. Ensure that the container is fully pushed in, and that the indicator light is not lit. 4. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps. 5. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 6. If fault persists, call for service.
013-221
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-222
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-223
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-224
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine.
18-19Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-225
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-226
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-227
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-228
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-229
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-230
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-231
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-20 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-232
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-233
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
0013-234
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-235
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-236
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-237
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-238
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
18-21Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-239
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-240
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-241
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-242
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-243
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
013-246
Cause: Jam or communication error with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Power off/on the machine. 2. If fault persists, call for service.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-22 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
013-303
Cause: A top cover is open or a jam/fault occurred with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps. 7. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 8. If fault persists, call for service.
013-304
Cause: A top cover is open
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 3. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 4. If fault persists, call for service.
013-915
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-916
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module.
18-23Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-917
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-918
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers. 4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-919
Cause: Jam/fault with the SquareFold Trimmer Module
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Open the Top Left and Right Covers of the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 2. Carefully remove all sheets and paper scraps from jam clearance areas. 3. Close the SquareFold Trimmer Module Top Left and Right Covers.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-24 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
4. Check the Trimmer Waste Container:
If full, empty the container and reinsert it in the SquareFold Trimmer Module. If the container is partially pulled out, push it completely in.
5. If necessary, follow any remaining instructions on the machines UI. 6. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps; if fault persists after that, call for service.
013-940
Cause: The Trimmer Waste Container is full or has a fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Pull open the container and empty any trimmer scraps from it. 2. Reinsert the container into the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 3. Ensure that the container is fully pushed in, and that the indicator light is not lit. 4. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps. 5. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 6. If fault persists, call for service.
013-941
Cause: The Trimmer Waste Container is full or has a fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Pull open the container and empty any trimmer scraps from it. 2. Reinsert the container into the SquareFold Trimmer Module. 3. Ensure that the container is fully pushed in, and that the indicator light is not lit. 4. If fault persists, repeat the previous steps. 5. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 6. If fault persists, call for service.
013-943
Cause: Booklet Tray on the SquareFold Trimmer Module is full
Remedy: Perform the following:
1. Remove any booklets from the tray. 2. If fault persists, power off/on the machine. 3. If fault persists, call for service.
18-25Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
Technical data
Specifications
SpecificationsItem
Maximum: 13 x 18 in./330 x 457 mm
Minimum: 8.5 x 11 in./A4 SEF
Note The SquareFold Trimmer Module requires both Interface Module and the Booklet Maker Finisher.
Paper size
5-20 sheet booklet (up to 80 imaged sides) at 24 lb./90 gsm
5-25 sheet booklet (up to 100 imaged sides) at 200 lb./80 gsm
Cut amount: 2-20 mm, adjustable in 0.1 mm increments
Trim capacity
16 lb. bond-90 lb. cover (60-220 gsm)Paper weights
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses18-26 User Guide
SquareFold Trimmer Module
19 Standard Finisher Plus
The Standard Finisher Plus acts as a communication device and provides a paper path between the print engine, the required Interface Module/Interface Cooling Module, and any third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) device that is attached to the machine.
The Standard Finisher Plus supports a number of optional finishing devices ranging from light-production print engines to futuristic devices that utilize other communication and physical interfaces.
Overview Note The Standard Finisher Plus requires either the Interface Module or the Interface Cooling Module (depending on your product and machine configuration).
The Standard Finisher Plus consists of these two modules:
19-1Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
1. Finisher Module
2. Finishing Transport
Output prints are fed from the machine (and any attached optional finishing device) to the Finisher Module. The Finishing Transport serves as an interface to transfer paper from the Finisher Module and the attached third-party output device. The Finishing Transport moves the paper from the Finisher Module to one of the three Finishing Transport exits. The height of the paper entry on the third-party, DFA device must align with the Finishing Transport exit 1 or exit 2.
The Finishing Transport is built to support a number of finishing operations ranging from light-production print engines to futuristic devices that utilize other communication and physical interfaces.
Finisher Module
Finisher Module main components
The Finisher Module includes the following components:
FunctionComponentNo.
Output prints are fed from the machine through the re- quired Interface Module or Interface Cooling Module (depending on product and machine configuration) to the Finisher Module which then feeds the prints to the Finishing Transport for delivery to a third-party output device. The Finisher Module is shown here with the optional C/Z Folder.
Finisher Module1
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-2 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
FunctionComponentNo.
This tray is standard on this finisher and is used to load paper that will be used as separators and covers.
Paper loaded here is not printed on; use this tray for pre-printed stock and for insertion into the printed output. (This tray is also known as the Interposer).
Tray 8 holds a maximum of 200 sheets when using 20 lb./75 gsm paper.
Paper can be loaded in the LEF or SEF direction.
Post-process inserter (Tray 8/Tray T1)
2
Collects the scraps from the puncher. Open to remove the scraps.
Punch scrap container3
Contains staples; remove this cartridge to replace staples and clear staple jams.
Staple cartridge4
Container for staple waste; remove this container when full.
Staple waste container5
The Top Tray is used for stacked output, and can receive up to 500 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm paper. Copies are de- livered here when specific output features are selected, such as Automatic sorting, Collated, Uncollated, or Nor- mal.
Top tray6
The Stacker Tray is used for offset and/or stapled output, and can hold up to 2000 sheets of 20 lb./80 gsm paper. This tray also receives copies when you punch and Z-fold copies.
Note Both the Top and Stacker Trays can be used for hole punched output (optional).
Stacker (middle) tray7
Open to clear paper jams, replace staples, clear jammed staples, or remove the scraps from the puncher.
Right cover8
The optional Folder tray receives copies when you select C-folding or Z-folding of 8.5 x 11 in./A4 output and 11 x 17 in./A3 media.
C/Z-Fold output tray (option- al)
9
Open this cover to access the machine and to clear paper jams.
Left cover.10
Folding feature
If your machine is equipped with the Booklet Maker Finisher and/or the C/Z Folder, you can make prints using the folding option. The option folds your prints in half (single or bi-folding) or in thirds (C-fold or Z-fold types). The folding option is selected from the print driver.
19-3Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Note In order to use the folding option, the orientation of documents must be short-edge feed (SEF). You must select a paper tray that contains SEF stock.
Fold types Important The Single Fold (Bi-Fold) option is available only with the Booklet Maker Finisher. The C-Fold and Z-Fold options are available only with the C/Z Folder.
These fold types are available:
Single Fold (Bi-Fold)
A Bi-Fold has one fold which creates two panels to the output. The Single Fold output is delivered to the Booklet Output Tray.
C-Fold
A C-Fold has two folds which creates a three-panel output. The C-Fold output is delivered to the C/Z Fold output tray.
Z-Fold
A Z-Fold has two folds that are folded in opposite directions, resulting in a type of fan fold. The Z-Fold output is delivered to the C/Z Fold output tray.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-4 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Z-Fold Half Sheet (shown here with 3-hole punch)
As with a regular Z-Fold, it has two folds that are folded in the opposite directions. The difference between a regular Z-Fold and a Z-Fold Half Sheet is that the Z-Fold Half Sheet is not folded in two equal folds. The two folds are unequal which allows one edge of the Z-Fold Half Sheet to have a longer edge, and the longer edge allows for stapling or hole punching. The Z-Fold Half-Sheet output is delivered to the C/Z Fold output tray.
Loading paper/tabs in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter) 1. If necessary, remove any remaining media that is currently loaded in Tray 8/T1. 2. Hold the center of the paper guides and slide them to their desired paper size.
3. Load the paper/tabs, aligning it to the front side of the tray.
a) If the paper is preprinted, load the paper with the printed side facing up. b) If the media is tab stock, load the tab side to be fed first (in the direction of the
arrow as shown in the above illustration).
4. From the Tray Properties window, enter the correct paper information, including size, type, weight, and if necessary, decurler and/or alignment option
19-5Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
If enabled by your System Administrator, the Paper Tray Properties screen may be displayed on the UI.
5. Select OK to save the information and close the Tray Properties window.
Finishing Transport
Finishing Transport main components
The Finishing Transport is comprised of the following components:
FunctionComponentNo.
The Finishing Transport serves as an interface to transfer paper from the Finisher Module and the at- tached third-party output device.
Finishing Transport1
This display indicates the status of the Finishing Transport and shows the locations of any paper jams.
Finishing Transport status display2
Open to clear paper jams and clean the paper path areas.
Finishing Transport front door3
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-6 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Finishing Transport status indicators
The mimic display indicates the status of the Finishing Transport and the location of the paper jams.
Refer to the following table for detailed information on the
ReasonStatusLED ColorLocation
The Finishing Transport power is on and functioning properly.
ONGreenPower indicator
The Finishing Transport power is off.OFF
May be one of the following:
Paper jam indication
Open front door
ONRedFault indicator
Paper jam in Area 1ONRedArea 1
Paper jam in Area 2ONRedArea 2
Paper jam in Area 3ONRedArea 3
Paper jam in Area 4ONRedArea 4
19-7Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Standard Finisher Plus maintenance
Standard Finisher Plus consumable supplies
Xerox supplies, paper, and throughput material can be ordered from Xerox by going to www.xerox.com and clicking on either the Contact Us link for specific contact information/telephone numbers in your area or by clicking on the Supplies and entering/selecting your specific machine information (product family and model type).
Note Always refer to www.xerox.com for the latest Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) part numbers.
Store supply items and Xerox parts in their original packages in a convenient location.
Supply Unit Shipped with finisher/Reorder QuantitySupply Item
4 staple cartridges (5000 staples per cartridge) and 1 staple waste container per carton
Staple cartridge/staple waste con- tainer
Replace the standard staple cartridge
A message displays on the UI when it is time to replace a staple cartridge. 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-8 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.
4. Hold the positions as indicated by the arrow and remove the staple cartridge from the unit.
5. Push a new staple cartridge into the unit.
6. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
19-9Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Replacing the Staple Waste Container on the finisher
The machine displays a message indicating that the Staple Waste Container is full. To replace the container: 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Locate the Staple Waste Container ( R5) in the finisher, and move the lock lever to the unlock position.
4. Hold R5 as shown in the figure and remove the staple waste container from the machine.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-10 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
5. Place the used staple waste container into a supplied plastic bag.
Note Do not return a disassembled (used) container to the Customer Support Center.
6. Hold the new staple waste container by the R5 handle area and push it into the machine.
Note To prevent injury, do not put your fingers on top of the container.
7. Push R5 until the lock lever moves to the locked position.
8. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
19-11Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Empty the Punch Waste Container
The UI displays a message indicating when it is time to empty the Punch Waste Container.
Caution Only remove the Punch Waste Container while the system is powered ON. If you switch off the power when emptying the container, the machine cannot detect that the container was emptied.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull the container out of the finisher ( R4).
4. Discard all the punch scraps in an appropriate container.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-12 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
5. Reinsert the empty container into the machine.
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Problem solving
Paper jams in the Finisher Module
Paper jams in Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter) 1. Press the Cover button.
2. Open cover 1e and then remove the jammed paper and all paper loaded in the tray.
19-13Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Fan the paper you removed, making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned, and then load them again.
4. Push cover 1e until you hear it click into place.
Note A message is displayed and the machine does not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams inside the finisher left cover
Paper jams at lever 1a and knob 1c 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the finisher left cover.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-14 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
3. Move lever 1a downward and turn knob 1c left. Remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return lever 1a to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 1d 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the finisher left cover.
19-15Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
3. Move lever 1d upwards and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move the lever 1d to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 1b 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the finisher left cover.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-16 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
3. Move the lever 1b to the right and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Move the lever 1b to the original position.
5. Close the finisher left cover completely.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams inside the finisher right cover
Paper jams at lever 3b and 3d Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
19-17Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the levers 3b and 3d; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the levers 3b and 3d to their original positions.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-18 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams at lever 3e and knob 3c Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 3e and turn the knob 3c; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 3e its original position.
19-19Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 3g and knob 3f Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 3g and turn the knob 3f and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-20 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
4. Return the lever 3g its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at lever 4b and knob 3a Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 4b and turn the knob 3a; remove the jammed paper.
19-21Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 4b its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at the optional C/Z Folder Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
This section describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the following locations:
Paper jams at lever 2a and knob 3a Paper jams at lever 2b and knob 2c Remove jams at knob 2c, levers 2e and 2f, and the folder output tray (2d) Paper jams at the folder output tray (2d) and at lever 2g
Note Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jams at lever 2a and knob 3a Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-22 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 2a and turn the knob 3a; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 2a to its original position.
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
19-23Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams at lever 2b and knob 2c Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the lever 2b and turn the knob 2c; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the lever 2b to its original position.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-24 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out the folder output tray ( 2d), swing lever 2e to the right, and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
19-25Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
4. If you cannot remove the paper, return the lever 2e to its original position. Swing the lever 2e, turn the knob 2c to the right, and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
5. Return the opened lever ( 2f) or ( 2e) to its original position, and close the output tray ( 2d).
6. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams at 2d and lever 2g Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-26 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Pull out the folder output tray ( 2d), swing lever the 2g, and remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the opened lever ( 2g) to its original position, and close the output tray ( 2d).
5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
19-27Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams in areas 4b and 4c Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Move the levers 4b and 4c; remove the jammed paper.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
4. Return the opened levers ( 4b and 4c) their original positions. 5. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-28 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams at the finisher output area Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs.
This section describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the following locations:
Paper jams at the finisher top tray Paper jams at the finisher stacker tray
Note Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Paper jams at finisher top tray 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Remove jammed paper from the finisher top tray.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Open and close the finisher right cover.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
19-29Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams at finisher stacker tray 1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing. 2. Remove jammed paper from the finisher stacker tray.
Note If paper is torn, check inside the machine and remove it.
3. Open and close the finisher right cover.
Note The machine will not operate if the cover is open even slightly.
Paper jams in the Finishing Transport
Paper jams in area 1
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-30 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs. If paper is torn, check inside the Finishing Transport and remove it.
1. Open the Finishing Transport front door.
2. Grasp the green handle 1 and gently pull downwards.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
For a paper jam at the exit of the Finisher Module and the entry of the Finishing Transport, remove it by pulling the paper towards the Finishing Transport.
4. Return the green handle 1 to its original position. 5. Close the Finishing Transport front door. 6. Ensure that the paper jam indication is cleared from the Finishing Transport status
display. 7. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
19-31Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams in area 2
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs. If paper is torn, check inside the Finishing Transport and remove it.
1. Open the Finishing Transport front door.
2. Grasp the green handle 2 and gently pull down and toward the right.
3. Remove the jammed paper. 4. If necessary, rotate the green knob in the direction shown to remove any jammed
paper in this area. 5. Return the green handle 2 to its original position. 6. Close the Finishing Transport front door. 7. Ensure that the paper jam indication is cleared from the Finishing Transport status
display.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-32 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
8. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
Paper jams in area 3
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs. If paper is torn, check inside the Finishing Transport and remove it.
1. Open the Finishing Transport front door.
2. Grasp the green handle 3 and gently pull toward the left.
3. Remove the jammed paper. 4. Return the green handle 3 to its original position. 5. Close the Finishing Transport front door. 6. Ensure that the paper jam indication is cleared from the Finishing Transport status
display. 7. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
19-33Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Paper jams in area 4
Remedies differ according to the paper jam location. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Tip Always ensure that all paper jams, including any small ripped pieces of paper, are cleared before proceeding with your print jobs. If paper is torn, check inside the Finishing Transport and remove it.
1. Open the Finishing Transport front door.
2. Grasp the green handle 4 and gently pull toward the right.
3. Remove the jammed paper. 4. Check for and remove any jammed paper between the Finishing Transport exit and
the entrance to the attached third-party device. 5. Return the green handle 4 to its original position. 6. Close the Finishing Transport front door. 7. Ensure that the paper jam indication is cleared from the Finishing Transport status
display.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-34 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
8. Follow the instructions on the UI to restart your print job.
Stapler faults
Follow the procedures provided when the output is not stapled or the staples are bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the following solutions. Stapler faults on output may look similar to the ones shown in the following illustration.
1. No staple
2. Bent staple
3. One side of staple rising up
4. Staple bent in reverse direction
5. Flattened staple
6. Entire staple rising up
7. Staple rising up with the center pressed in
If the output is stapled as shown in the figure above, contact our Customer Support Center.
Note Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled, the stapled nails may be bent. If the bent nails are stuck inside the machine, they may eventually cause paper jams. Remove the bent staple when opening the staple cartridge cover. If you do not remove the bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result. Use the staple cartridge cover only when removing the bent staple.
Staple jams in the standard staple cartridge
Perform the following procedure to clear staple jams in the standard staple cartridge.
Note Always check inside the finisher for any individual staples or staple remnants.
1. Make sure that the machine has stopped printing.
19-35Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
2. Open the right cover on the finisher.
3. Grasp the Staple Cartridge handle located at R1, and pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.
4. Check the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples, and if necessary, remove them.
5. Open the staple cartridge unit as shown and remove the jammed staple.
Warning To avoid injury to your fingers, carefully remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-36 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
6. Reinstall the cartridge unit to its original position in the finisher.
7. Close the right cover on the finisher.
Note A message will display and the machine will not operate if the right cover is open even slightly.
Standard Finisher Plus fault codes
Finisher Module fault codes
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
013-108
Cause: The transport in sensor in the Finishing Transport did not switch ON within a specified amount of time.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
013-109
Cause: The transport exit sensor in the Finishing Transport did not switch ON within a specified amount of time.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
19-37Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
013-110
Cause: The transport exit sensor in the Finishing Transport did not switch OFF within a specified amount of time.
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
013-910
Cause: Paper jam at the transport in sensor (Finishing Transport)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
013-911
Cause: Paper jam at the transport exit sensor (Finishing Transport)
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Finishing Transport fault codes
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
051-100
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-38 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
051-101
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-102
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-103
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-104
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-105
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
19-39Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-106
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-107
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-108
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-109
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-110
Cause: Paper jam
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-40 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-111
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-210
Cause: Registration clutch solenoid fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-211
Cause: Diverter solenoid fault
Remedy: Perform the following:
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-300
Cause: Finishing Transport front door is open
Remedy: Close the front door of the Finishing Transport.
051-310
Cause: Finishing Transport firmware fault upgrade
Remedy: Perform the following:
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
19-41Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
051-900
Cause: Paper jam
Remedy: Perform the following:
Check for any obstructions or paper jams in the Finishing Module and Finishing Transport paper paths and clear them.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
Third-party DFA fault codes
The following table provides a list of fault codes that indicate that a jam or fault has occurred in the attached third-party, Document Finishing Architecture (DFA) device.
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after following the listed solution, then contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
051-910
Cause: Either the DFA device is not ready or other fault has occurred with it
Remedy: Perform the following:
Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the instructions to bring the device back online.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-911
Cause: Either the DFA device is not ready or other fault has occurred with it
Remedy: Perform the following:
Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the instructions to bring the device back online.
If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print job.
If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-912
Cause: The DFA device is either full or out of supplies
Remedy: Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the instructions to clear the fault and/or replenish the depleted supplies.
051-913
Cause: Paper jam in the DFA device
Remedy: Perform the following:
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-42 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the instructions to clear the fault.
If necessary, set the correct profile value; refer to the System Administration Guide, Profiles chapter for more information.
If necessary, refer to the DFA user documentation for setting/changing profile values. If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job. If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-914
Cause: Paper jam in the DFA device
Remedy: Perform the following:
Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the instructions to clear the fault.
If necessary, set the correct profile value; refer to the System Administration Guide, Profiles chapter for more information.
If necessary, refer to the DFA user documentation for setting/changing profile values. If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job. If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
051-915
Cause: Paper jam in the DFA device
Remedy: Perform the following:
Refer to any user documentation that came with your DFA device and follow the instructions to clear the fault.
If necessary, set the correct profile value; refer to the System Administration Guide, Profiles chapter for more information.
If necessary, refer to the DFA user documentation for setting/changing profile values. If necessary, power Off/On the machine, and if necessary, resend/restart your print
job. If the fault persists, contact the Customer Support Center.
19-43Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Specifications This section provides specifications on the Standard Finisher Plus.
Finisher Module specifications
SpecificationItem
Top Tray: Collated/Uncollated Stacker (middle) Tray: Collated/Uncollated (Offset available)
Tray Type
Top Tray:
Maximum: SRA3, 13 x19 in., 12.6 x19.2 in., 330 x 488 mm (custom size)
Minimum: 100 x 148 mm (SEF), 4 x 6 in. (SEF), A6 (SEF) postcards
Stacker (middle) Tray:
Maximum: 13 x 19 in. (330 x 488 mm), SRA3 Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Booklet Tray (optional Booklet Maker Finisher only):
Maximum: 13 x 18 in., SRA3 Minimum: A4 (SEF), 8.5 x 11 in. (SEF)
Optional C/Z Folder tray: Supports A4 (SEF) and 8.5 x 11 in. (SEF) Delivery to a supported third-party, DFA device:
Maximum: 13 x 19 in., SRA3 Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Supported Paper Size
Trays:
Top Tray: 55-350 gsm Stacker (middle) Tray: 55-300 gsm Booklet Tray (optional Booklet Maker Finisher only):
- Center binding 64-300 gsm - Center folding 60-105 gsm
Optional C/Z Folder tray: 64-90 gsm
Delivery to a supported third-party, DFA device: 55-350 gsm
Supported Paper Weight
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-44 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
SpecificationItem
Top Tray: 500 sheets Stacker (middle)Tray: 2,000 sheets, 200 sets* Booklet Tray (optional Booklet Maker Finisher only): 20 sets** Optional C/Z Folder tray: Minimum 30 sheets
*When using A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8.5 x 11 in. LEF, 8 x 10 in. LEF, 7.5 x 10.5 in. LEF only. When using paper of other sizes, tray capacity is 1,500 sheets and 100 sets. **Tray may not support some paper types.
Tray Capacity
Maximum staple sheets: 100 sheets
When using paper of size larger than A4 or 8.5 x 11 in., the max- imum number of sheets that can be stapled is 65.
Staple nails may bend when using certain paper types.
Paper size:
Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in. Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Staple position:
1 location: (front: angled stapling, center: parallel stapling, back: parallel stapling*)
2 locations: (parallel stapling) 4 locations: A4 (LEF) and 8.5 x 11 in. (LEF) parallel stapling
*: Angled stapling for A3 and A4
Stapling (variable length)
Supported paper size:
Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in. Minimum: B5 LEF (2 holes), A4 LEF (4 holes)
Number of holes: 2, 4, 3 (optional) Paper type: 55-220 gsm
Hole Punching
19-45Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
SpecificationItem
Maximum number of sheets:
Fold and Staple: 25 sheets Fold only: 5 sheets
When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper, only 14 sheets can be stapled if adding a cover. Paper size:
Maximum: A3, 13 x 18 in. Minimum: A4 SEF, 8.5 x 11 in. SEF
Note When using light-weight stocks, media jams may occur with Booklet Creation, Single Fold, and stapling for output that is 25 sheets or more. If media jams do occur, it is recommended that a different media type is selected for the job.
Paper type: Fold only or Fold and Staple: 55-350gsm uncoated, 106- 300gsm coated Paper Weights/Booklet Capacity:
64-80 gsm, Uncoated: 25 sheets 81-90 gsm, Uncoated: 20 sheets 91-105 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets 106-128 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets 129-150 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets 151-176 gsm, Uncoated: 10 sheets, Coated: 10 sheets 177-220 gsm, Uncoated: 5 sheets, Coated: 5 sheets 221-256gsm, 4 sheets max. coated or uncoated 257-350gsm, 3 sheets max, coated or uncoated
Booklet Creation/Single Fold
Note Non-stapled fold sets are limited to 5 sheets of paper.
Folding
Paper size:
Maximum: A3/11 x 17 in. Minimum: B5, Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.)
The machine does not print on paper loaded in Tray 8/T1. Capacity: 200 sheets when using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper. Paper type: 64-220 gsm
Tray 8/T1 (Post-Process Inserter; also called Inter- poser)
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-46 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Optional C/Z Folder
SpecificationItem
Z-paper size: 11 x 17 in./A3, 10 x 14 in./B4, 8K Capacity:
- Maximum: 80 sheets (A3/11 x 17 in. Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm paper Z folding)
- 20 sheets for 8K and 10 x 14 in./B4
Paper type: 16-24 lb./64-90 gsm Output tray: Stacker (middle) tray
Z-Fold Half Sheet
Paper size: A4/8.5 x 11 in. Number of sheets to be folded: 1 sheet Capacity: Minimum 30 sheets (When using Xerox 20 lb./75 gsm
paper.) Paper type: 16-24 lb./64-90 gsm Output tray: C/Z Folder tray
C-Fold Z-Fold
Finishing Transport specifications
SpecificationItem
7.16 x 19.2 in./182 x 488 mm, Process direction. Center Registered: 7.16 x 13 in./;182 x 330.2 mm, Process direction
Paper size
52-350 gsmPaper weight
Transparencies/Coated Paper Stock can be usedTransparencies/coated paper
50 to 155 prints per minute (ppm)Speed
19-47Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses19-48 User Guide
Standard Finisher Plus
Index 1-Sided print jobs
loading pre-drilled stock in Trays 1 and 2 6-3 loading pre-drilled stock in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-5
2-Sided print jobs loading pre-drilled stock in Trays 1 and 2 6-3 loading pre-drilled stock in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-6
A Administrator
logon 5-1 options 5-1
B Billing
Billing meters 3-2 Booklet Maker Finisher
C Calibration 1-5 Call for service 10-2 Cancel job 3-6 Change language 1-4 Charge corotron 9-16, 10-4, 10-36, 10-42, 10-45 Cleaning procedures 9-1
paper path 9-1 area 2 9-2 area 3 and area 4 9-4 area 5 9-7 area 6 9-9 area 7 9-12
UI screen 9-1 Clear dry ink
Clear toner 1-6 Color calibration 1-5 Consumable supplies list
CRU list 9-15 Counters 3-2 Customer Replaceable Units
CRUs dry ink/toner cartrdige 3-1
dry ink/toner waste bottle 9-19 replacing a dry ink/toner cartridge 9-16 replacing a dry ink/toner waste bottle 9-20 replacing consumable supplies 9-15 replacing the Fuser Web Assembly 9-21
D Drum cartridge 10-42 Dry ink
clear 1-6 dry ink/toner
status area cartridges 3-1
dry ink/toner waste bottle 9-19 dry ink/toner yield 9-15 Gold 1-6 replacing a dry ink/toner cartridge 9-16 replacing a dry ink/toner waste bottle 9-20 Silver 1-6
E Environmental specifications 11-4 Error codes Exit User Interface 3-1
F Fault codes 10-23
Interface Module fault codes 14-8 OHCF fault codes SquareFold Trimmer Module 18-15
Feeding devices 1-8 Finishing devices 1-8 First print-out time 11-2 Full Width Array 1-5 Fuser Web Assembly
replacing the Fuser Web Assembly 9-21
G GBC AdvancedPunch 1-9
iXerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
H Help 2-1
Help menu 2-1 on the Print server customer documentation CD/DVD 2-2 on the User Interface 2-1 on the World Wide Web 2-2
High Capacity Stacker (HCS) 1-10 components 15-2 control panel 15-3 fault codes 15-10 hints and tips 15-9 overview 15-1 paper jams
E1, E2, and E3 15-5 E4, E5, and E6 15-6 E7 15-7 E8 15-8
power, loss of 15-10 problem solving 15-5 specifications 15-25 stop button 15-3 top tray
stop button 15-3 unloading
stacker tray 15-4
I Image quality 10-42 Incomplete print job 10-3 Interface Module 14-1
clearing jams 14-4 control panel 14-2 fault codes 14-8 manual decurler buttons on the Interface Module 14-3 paper curl settings on the Interface Module 14-3 paper jams at lever 1a 14-4 paper jams at lever 2a 14-5 paper jams at lever 2b 14-7 paper path 14-3 preset decurler settings on the Interface Module problem solving
J Job summary 3-6
L Language
Language button 1-3 Logon
as Administrator 5-1 logon button 1-3
Logon levels Administrator Operator
Administrator Technical Key Operator 1-3
Technical Key Operator
M Machine details 3-1 Machine serial number
on the machine 10-1, 10-3 on the UI 10-1
Machine specifications 11-1 Machine warmup time
from a cold start 11-2 from sleep mode (power saver) 11-2 from standby 11-2 when switching print modes 11-2
Maintenance 9-1 cleaning procedures 9-1
replacing consumable supplies Maintenance on the UI 3-4 replacing consumable supplies 9-15
Media loading media in the optional OHCF 13-4 loading media in Trays 1 and 2 6-1
O Offset Catch Tray (OCT) 12-1 Offset Mode
enabling on the EX Print Server 12-1 for the Offset Catch Tray 12-1
Optional feeding devices 1-8 Optional finishing devices 1-8 Ordering supplies
CRU list 9-15 Oversized High Capacity Feeder
OHCF 1-8, 13-1 OHCF problem solving 13-11 OHCF specifications 13-24
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Pressesii User Guide
Index
P Paper
curl settings on IM 10-6 settings on Interface Module 14-3 settings on the Interface Module 14-3
loading OHCF trays A1-1 and A1-2 13-4 trays 1 and 2 6-1
misfeeds wrinkled 10-5
multisheet feeds from a paper tray
curl settings on IM
multisheet feeds from a paper tray 10-5 OHCF trays A1-1 and A1-2 specifications 11-2 throughput information for all trays 11-2 tray capacity for trays 1 and 2 11-1 trays 1 and 2 6-1 trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-4
Paper jams High Capacity Stacker (HCS)
E1, E2, and E3 15-5 E4, E5, and E6 15-6 E7 15-7 E8 15-8
Interface Module lever 1a 14-4 lever 2a 14-5 lever 2b 14-7
OHCF inside trays A1-1 and A1-2 13-12 inside trays A1-1 and A1-2 13-12 lever 1a and knob 1c 13-12 lever 1b and knob 1c 13-13 lever 1d and knob 1c 13-14
printer module area 2 10-9 area 3 and area 4 10-12 area 5 10-15 area 6 10-17 area 7 10-20 Exit Output area
printer module Offset Catch Tray (OCT) area 10-6
paper tray area 10-5 printer module
Exit Output area printer module
Offset Catch Tray (OCT) area
tray 1 and tray 2 10-8 SquareFold Trimmer Module 18-12
E1/E2 18-13 E3 18-15
Standard Finisher Plus area 1 19-30 area 2 19-32 area 3 19-33 area 4 area4 19-34 areas 4b and 4c 19-28 at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d 19-25 at 2d and lever 2g 19-26 finisher stacker tray 17-28, 19-30 finisher top tray 17-27, 19-29 lever 1a and knob 1c 19-14 lever 1b 17-17, 19-16 lever 1d 17-16, 19-15 lever 2a and knob 3a 19-22 lever 2b and knob 2c 19-24 lever 3b and 3d 19-17 lever 3e and knob 3c 19-19 lever 3g and knob 3f 19-20 lever 4b and knob 3a 19-21 Tray 8 (Post-Process Inserter) 17-14, 19-13
Paper path 9-1 cleaning procedures 9-1
area 2 9-2 area 3 and area 4 9-4 area 5 9-7 area 6 9-9 area 7 9-12
Pause pause button 3-6
Perfect Binder 1-10 16-1 adjusting the printed image and trim 16-33 binder components 16-2 book binding path 16-8 bypass path 16-8 circuit breaker 16-7 cleaning the binder 16-25 control panel 16-6 cover inserter 16-4 cover inserter path 16-10 empty trimmer waste tray 16-26 external components 16-2 fault codes 16-33 general problems 16-32 internal components 16-5 loading media in the cover inserter tray 16-12
iiiXerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Index
maintenance 16-25 manual mode
CX Print Server 16-18 EX Print Server 16-21 FreeFlow Print Server 16-14
paper jams area E1 and area E2 16-28 area E3 16-29 area E4 16-30 area E5 and area E6 16-30
power 16-11 power interruption during operation 16-32 power saver mode 16-11 printing
FreeFlow Printer Server to binder 16-14 from your computer to binder 16-13 Xerox CX Print Server to binder 16-18 Xerox EX Print Server to binder 16-21
printing/binding preprinted covers
EX Print Server 16-22 FreeFlow Print Server 16-15
single file to CX Print Server 16-19 single file to EX Print Server 16-23 single file to FreeFlow Print Server 16-17 two files to CX Print Server 16-20
problem solving 16-27 removing books from the binder 16-13 replenishing the adhesive filling tray 16-26 specifications 16-38 standard path 16-9 submitting a job to the binder 16-13
Postcard bracket 11-1, 13-2 using the Postcard bracket 13-2
Power no power 10-3
system warmup time power button 1-7 power off 1-7 power on 1-7 power switch 1-7
power button power on
power off system warmup time 10-4
Power saver power saver button 1-4 power saver modes 1-4
Pre-drilled stock loading in Trays 1 and 2 6-3, 6-3 loading in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-5, 13-6
Pre-drilled stockTrays
loading in Trays 1 and 2 6-3, 6-3 with 1-Sided print jobs 6-3 with 2-Sided print jobs 6-3
Print server overview 1-4
Printed output problems curl
settings on IM 10-6 Image quality defects 10-42 misfeeds
wrinkled 10-5 multisheet feeds from a paper tray 10-5 output not on desired paper size 10-4
misfeeds wrinkled
multisheet feeds from a paper tray
curl paper curl settings on the IM
paper curl settings on the Interface Module 14-3
Printing 4-1 from the Xerox CX Print Server 4-2 from the Xerox EX Print Server 4-2 from the Xerox FreeFlow Print Server 4-1 from your computer 4-1
Prints Per Minute (ppm) 1-1 Problem solving 10-1
High Capacity Stacker (HCS) 15-5 Interface Module problem solving OHCF problem solving 13-11 SquareFold Trimmer Module 18-12 Standard Finisher Plus 19-13
Q Quick start 1-2
R Recommended Media List
RML 7-2 Restart User Interface 3-1 Resume job 3-6
S Serial number
on the machine 10-1, 10-3 on the UI 10-1
Service call 10-2
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Pressesiv User Guide
Index
Shutdown System PC 3-1 Skew adjustment levers
for trays 1 and 2 for trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 6-5, 13-7
for trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) Specialty Dry Ink 1-5 SquareFold Trimmer Module 18-1
components 18-2 control panel 18-4 fault codes 18-15 fold options 18-5 fold options, accessing 18-6 hints and tips 18-11
full-page images, printing 18-11 indicator lights 18-4 overview 18-1 paper jams 18-12
E1/E2 18-13 E3 18-15
paper path 18-3 problem solving 18-12 specifications square fold feature 18-4
fold options 18-5 fold options, accessing 18-5
trimmer feature 18-7 finished booklet size 18-8 trimmer options 18-7 trimmer options, accessing 18-10 trimming guidelines 18-8
trimmer options 18-7 trimmer options, accessing 18-10
Standard Finisher 1-11 Standard Finisher Plus 1-12, 19-1
fault codes Finisher Module 19-37 Finishing Transport 19-38 third-party DFA 19-42
Finisher Module components 19-2 fault codes 19-37 fold types 17-4, 19-4 specifications 19-44
optional C/Z folder 19-47 Finishing Transport 19-47
components 19-6 fault codes 19-38 specifications 19-47 status indicators 19-7
fold types 17-4, 19-4 maintenance
punch waste container, emptying 17-12, 19-12
standard staple cartridge, replacing 17-7, 19-8 standard staple waste container, replacing 17-10, 19-10
overview 19-1 paper jams
area 1 19-30 area 2 19-32 area 3 19-33 area 4 19-34 areas 4b and 4c 19-28 at 2c, 2e, 2f, and 2d 19-25 at 2d and lever 2g 19-26 finisher stacker tray 17-28, 19-30 finisher top tray 17-27, 19-29 lever 1a and knob 1c 19-14 lever 1b 17-17, 19-16 lever 1d 17-16, 19-15 lever 2a and knob 3a 19-22 lever 2b and knob 2c 19-24 lever 3b and 3d 19-17 lever 3e and knob 3c 19-19 lever 3g and knob 3f 19-20 lever 4b and knob 3a 19-21 Tray 8 (Post-Process Inserter) 17-14, 19-13
problem solving 19-13 punch waste container, emptying 17-12, 19-12 specifications 19-44, 19-47
Finisher Module 19-44 optional C/Z folder 19-47
Finishing Transport standard staple cartridge, replacing 17-7, 19-8 standard staple waste container, replacing 17-10, 19-10 staple jams
in standard staple cartridge 19-35 stapler faults 17-30, 19-35 third-party DFA
fault codes 19-42 Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher 17-1
components 17-1 Stock Library Submitting a print job 4-1
from the Xerox CX Print Server 4-2 from the Xerox EX Print Server 4-2 from the Xerox FreeFlow Print Server 4-1 from your computer 4-1
Summary button 3-6 Supplies
dry ink/toner cartridge 9-16 dry ink/toner waste bottle 9-19, 9-20
vXerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Presses User Guide
Index
ordering CRUs 9-15 replacing the Fuser Web Assembly 9-21
System Administrator logon as Administrator 5-1 options 5-1
System menu 3-1
T Tab stock
loading in Trays 1 and 2 6-1 loading in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-4
Technical data 11-1 Technical Key Operator (TKO) 1-3, 9-16, 10-4, 10-24, 10-36, 10-42, 10-45 Third-party finishing devices 1-13 Throughput information 11-2 Toner
clear 1-6 dry ink/toner
status area cartridges 3-1
dry ink/toner waste bottle 9-19 dry ink/toner yield 9-15 gold 1-6 replacing a dry ink/toner cartridge 9-16 replacing a dry ink/toner waste bottle 9-20 silver 1-6
Transparencies loading in Trays 1 and 2 6-2 loading in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-5
Tray capacity for trays 1 and 2 11-1
Tray Properties 6-6, 13-9 Tray stock mismatch 6-7, 13-10 Trays
loading media in Trays 1 and 2 6-1 loading media in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-4 loading paper in Trays 1 and 2 6-1 loading paper in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-4
loading pre-drilled stock in Trays 1 and 2 6-3, 6-3 loading pre-drilled stock in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-5, 13-6 loading tab stock in Trays 1 and 2 6-1 loading tab stock in Trays 1 and2 loading tab stock in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-4 loading transparencies in Trays 1 and 2 6-2 loading transparencies in Trays A1-1 and A1-2 (OHCF) 13-5 with 1-Sided print jobs
loading pre-drilled stock in Trays 1 and 2
with 1-Sided print jobs and the optional OHCF 13-5 with 2-Sided print jobs
loading pre-drilled stock in Trays 1 and 2
with 2-Sided print jobs and the optional OHCF 13-6
U Usage counters 3-2 User Interface
cleaning the UI screen 9-1 UI 1-2 UI does not respond 10-5
UI is locked up UI monitor screen is blank
UI help 2-1 UI is locked up 10-5 UI monitor screen is blank 10-5 User Interface help 2-1
W Warmup time 10-4
from a cold start 11-2 from sleep mode (power saver) 11-2 from standby 11-2 when switching print modes 11-2
World Wide Web help www.xerox.com 2-2
Xerox Color 800i/1000i Presses Xerox Color 800/1000 Pressesvi User Guide
Index
Related manuals for Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Color 1000 Xerox works, you can view and download the Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the User Guide for Xerox Color 1000 as well as other Xerox manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The User Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Xerox Color 1000. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Xerox Color 1000 Press User Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.